| 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 23 Jan 1999 |
| 2 | Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 3 | See the end for copying conditions. |
| 4 | |
| 5 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. |
| 6 | For older news, see the file ONEWS. |
| 7 | |
| 8 | \f |
| 9 | * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
| 10 | |
| 11 | ** Faces and frame parameters. |
| 12 | |
| 13 | There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. |
| 14 | Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
| 15 | `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face |
| 16 | `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' |
| 17 | sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise |
| 18 | for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame |
| 19 | parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. |
| 20 | |
| 21 | Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the |
| 22 | `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters |
| 23 | `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
| 24 | `default' face and vice versa. |
| 25 | |
| 26 | ** New face `menu'. |
| 27 | |
| 28 | The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. |
| 29 | Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; |
| 30 | attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. |
| 31 | |
| 32 | ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
| 33 | |
| 34 | The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for |
| 35 | colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma |
| 36 | correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies |
| 37 | the screen gamma of a frame's display. |
| 38 | |
| 39 | PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result |
| 40 | in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD |
| 41 | color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). |
| 42 | |
| 43 | The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class |
| 44 | `ScreenGamma'. |
| 45 | |
| 46 | ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
| 47 | |
| 48 | The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. |
| 49 | Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing |
| 50 | oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height |
| 51 | of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in |
| 52 | the text. |
| 53 | |
| 54 | ** Emacs has a new face implementation. |
| 55 | |
| 56 | The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the |
| 57 | font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, |
| 58 | height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. |
| 59 | These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together |
| 60 | specify a font. |
| 61 | |
| 62 | Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. |
| 63 | These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found |
| 64 | under Lisp changes, below. |
| 65 | |
| 66 | ** New default font is Courier 12pt. |
| 67 | |
| 68 | ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of |
| 69 | its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise, |
| 70 | it is hollow. |
| 71 | |
| 72 | ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display |
| 73 | truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The |
| 74 | foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by |
| 75 | customizing face `fringe'. |
| 76 | |
| 77 | ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You |
| 78 | can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'. |
| 79 | |
| 80 | ** LessTif support. |
| 81 | |
| 82 | Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will |
| 83 | need a version 0.88.1 or later. |
| 84 | |
| 85 | ** Toolkit scroll bars. |
| 86 | |
| 87 | Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for |
| 88 | LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when |
| 89 | configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll |
| 90 | bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll |
| 91 | bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring |
| 92 | Emacs. |
| 93 | |
| 94 | When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how |
| 95 | Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from |
| 96 | Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your |
| 97 | Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a |
| 98 | define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take |
| 99 | `s/freebsd.h' as an example. |
| 100 | |
| 101 | Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take |
| 102 | a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the |
| 103 | directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on |
| 104 | different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your |
| 105 | system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', |
| 106 | add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. |
| 107 | |
| 108 | The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or |
| 109 | `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. |
| 110 | This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's |
| 111 | image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
| 112 | Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
| 113 | |
| 114 | ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. |
| 115 | |
| 116 | When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit |
| 117 | widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for |
| 118 | Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. |
| 119 | |
| 120 | ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
| 121 | |
| 122 | When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing |
| 123 | whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is |
| 124 | defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy |
| 125 | highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not |
| 126 | displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the |
| 127 | whitespace. |
| 128 | |
| 129 | ** Busy-cursor. |
| 130 | |
| 131 | Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the |
| 132 | display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. |
| 133 | |
| 134 | ** Blinking cursor |
| 135 | |
| 136 | M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on |
| 137 | terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking |
| 138 | and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in |
| 139 | the group `cursor'. |
| 140 | |
| 141 | ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
| 142 | |
| 143 | This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is |
| 144 | generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. |
| 145 | See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more |
| 146 | details. |
| 147 | |
| 148 | Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't |
| 149 | have to do anything to activate it. |
| 150 | |
| 151 | ** Tabs and variable-width text. |
| 152 | |
| 153 | Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is |
| 154 | defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is |
| 155 | independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. |
| 156 | Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. |
| 157 | |
| 158 | ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar |
| 159 | |
| 160 | *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
| 161 | |
| 162 | emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 |
| 163 | |
| 164 | The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif |
| 165 | one. |
| 166 | |
| 167 | *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in |
| 168 | Motif. |
| 169 | |
| 170 | ** Hscrolling in C code. |
| 171 | |
| 172 | Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically. |
| 173 | |
| 174 | ** Tool bar support. |
| 175 | |
| 176 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details |
| 177 | how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes. |
| 178 | |
| 179 | ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
| 180 | |
| 181 | Different parts of the mode line under X have been made |
| 182 | mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode |
| 183 | line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help |
| 184 | about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or |
| 185 | in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. |
| 186 | |
| 187 | Currently, the following actions have been defined: |
| 188 | |
| 189 | - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two |
| 190 | buffers. |
| 191 | |
| 192 | - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and |
| 193 | M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. |
| 194 | |
| 195 | - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. |
| 196 | |
| 197 | - Mouse-1 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*') |
| 198 | toggles the read-only status. |
| 199 | |
| 200 | - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu. |
| 201 | |
| 202 | ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. |
| 203 | |
| 204 | When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name |
| 205 | from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialogs' is |
| 206 | non-nil. |
| 207 | |
| 208 | ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. |
| 209 | |
| 210 | Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. |
| 211 | Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if |
| 212 | the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and |
| 213 | italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. |
| 214 | Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face |
| 215 | attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored. |
| 216 | |
| 217 | ** Sound support |
| 218 | |
| 219 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs |
| 220 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). |
| 221 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio |
| 222 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' |
| 223 | to enable sound support. |
| 224 | |
| 225 | ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
| 226 | the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be |
| 227 | forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this |
| 228 | value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system |
| 229 | users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, |
| 230 | even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. |
| 231 | |
| 232 | The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. |
| 233 | |
| 234 | ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
| 235 | |
| 236 | As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be |
| 237 | drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set |
| 238 | `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. |
| 239 | |
| 240 | ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
| 241 | bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). |
| 242 | |
| 243 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable |
| 244 | `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this |
| 245 | variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. |
| 246 | |
| 247 | ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
| 248 | |
| 249 | When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the |
| 250 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a |
| 251 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
| 252 | fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
| 253 | |
| 254 | When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the |
| 255 | value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a |
| 256 | number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
| 257 | fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
| 258 | |
| 259 | ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, |
| 260 | notably at the end of lines. |
| 261 | |
| 262 | All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted |
| 263 | spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. |
| 264 | |
| 265 | ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
| 266 | query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated |
| 267 | after each match to get the replacement text. |
| 268 | |
| 269 | ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
| 270 | |
| 271 | If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are |
| 272 | longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is |
| 273 | on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size |
| 274 | by setting the following variable: |
| 275 | |
| 276 | - User option: max-mini-window-height |
| 277 | |
| 278 | Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a |
| 279 | fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it |
| 280 | specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize. |
| 281 | |
| 282 | Default is 0.25. |
| 283 | |
| 284 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 285 | |
| 286 | *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be |
| 287 | created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. |
| 288 | Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default |
| 289 | macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically |
| 290 | sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries |
| 291 | can be edited from that buffer. |
| 292 | |
| 293 | *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several |
| 294 | items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or |
| 295 | `A' to use all marked entries). |
| 296 | |
| 297 | *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce |
| 298 | memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. |
| 299 | |
| 300 | *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' |
| 301 | in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order |
| 302 | to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has |
| 303 | been cited. |
| 304 | |
| 305 | ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
| 306 | has the following new features: |
| 307 | |
| 308 | *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern |
| 309 | may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like |
| 310 | to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable |
| 311 | time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. |
| 312 | |
| 313 | *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This |
| 314 | feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source |
| 315 | file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the |
| 316 | compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching |
| 317 | pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it |
| 318 | defaults to 1. |
| 319 | |
| 320 | ** Tooltips. |
| 321 | |
| 322 | Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current |
| 323 | mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you |
| 324 | can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'. |
| 325 | |
| 326 | Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, |
| 327 | variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with |
| 328 | the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the |
| 329 | tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. |
| 330 | |
| 331 | ** Customize changes |
| 332 | |
| 333 | *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the |
| 334 | `State' menu to add comments. |
| 335 | |
| 336 | *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill |
| 337 | Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the |
| 338 | default). |
| 339 | |
| 340 | ** New features in evaluation commands |
| 341 | |
| 342 | The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
| 343 | modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
| 344 | print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the |
| 345 | customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, |
| 346 | eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. |
| 347 | |
| 348 | ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
| 349 | To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
| 350 | modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
| 351 | start sequences. |
| 352 | |
| 353 | ** Dired changes |
| 354 | |
| 355 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete |
| 356 | command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default |
| 357 | is, delete only empty directories. |
| 358 | |
| 359 | *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy |
| 360 | command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not |
| 361 | copy directories recursively. |
| 362 | |
| 363 | ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
| 364 | use the -f option when sending mail. |
| 365 | |
| 366 | ** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
| 367 | selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
| 368 | |
| 369 | ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
| 370 | names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
| 371 | sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) |
| 372 | |
| 373 | ** Shell script mode changes. |
| 374 | |
| 375 | Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells |
| 376 | derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and |
| 377 | sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
| 378 | |
| 379 | ** New modes and packages |
| 380 | |
| 381 | *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
| 382 | |
| 383 | *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. |
| 384 | |
| 385 | *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. |
| 386 | |
| 387 | *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
| 388 | Pascal) language. |
| 389 | |
| 390 | *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
| 391 | the text at point. |
| 392 | |
| 393 | *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. |
| 394 | |
| 395 | *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
| 396 | |
| 397 | *** whitespace.el ??? |
| 398 | |
| 399 | *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
| 400 | files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including |
| 401 | (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for |
| 402 | interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and |
| 403 | often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / |
| 404 | uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal |
| 405 | codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. |
| 406 | |
| 407 | *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. |
| 408 | |
| 409 | Here is an example of columns: |
| 410 | |
| 411 | horse apple bus |
| 412 | dog pineapple car EXTRA |
| 413 | porcupine strawberry airplane |
| 414 | |
| 415 | Doing the following settings: |
| 416 | |
| 417 | (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") |
| 418 | (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") |
| 419 | (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") |
| 420 | (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") |
| 421 | |
| 422 | |
| 423 | Selecting the lines above and typing: |
| 424 | |
| 425 | M-x delimit-columns-region |
| 426 | |
| 427 | It results: |
| 428 | |
| 429 | [ horse , apple , bus , ] |
| 430 | [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] |
| 431 | [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] |
| 432 | |
| 433 | delim-col has the following options: |
| 434 | |
| 435 | delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted |
| 436 | before all columns. |
| 437 | |
| 438 | delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted |
| 439 | between each column. |
| 440 | |
| 441 | delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted |
| 442 | after all columns. |
| 443 | |
| 444 | delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates |
| 445 | each column. |
| 446 | |
| 447 | delim-col has the following commands: |
| 448 | |
| 449 | delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. |
| 450 | delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. |
| 451 | |
| 452 | ** Withdrawn packages |
| 453 | |
| 454 | *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same |
| 455 | functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. |
| 456 | \f |
| 457 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
| 458 | |
| 459 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. |
| 460 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. |
| 461 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- |
| 462 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. |
| 463 | |
| 464 | ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
| 465 | because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
| 466 | |
| 467 | ** New function `propertize' |
| 468 | |
| 469 | The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct |
| 470 | strings with text properties. |
| 471 | |
| 472 | - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES |
| 473 | |
| 474 | Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified |
| 475 | by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with |
| 476 | PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the |
| 477 | specified value of that property. Example: |
| 478 | |
| 479 | (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) |
| 480 | |
| 481 | +++ |
| 482 | ** push and pop macros. |
| 483 | |
| 484 | A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
| 485 | is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
| 486 | as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
| 487 | |
| 488 | (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. |
| 489 | (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it |
| 490 | (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). |
| 491 | |
| 492 | +++ |
| 493 | ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such |
| 494 | as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. |
| 495 | |
| 496 | [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 |
| 497 | [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters |
| 498 | [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
| 499 | [:blank:] matches space and tab only |
| 500 | [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
| 501 | space, and DEL. |
| 502 | [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
| 503 | and DEL. |
| 504 | [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. |
| 505 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 506 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
| 507 | [:alpha:] matches letters. |
| 508 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 509 | it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
| 510 | [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
| 511 | [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
| 512 | [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. |
| 513 | [:punct:] matches punctuation. |
| 514 | (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
| 515 | it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
| 516 | [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
| 517 | [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. |
| 518 | [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. |
| 519 | |
| 520 | +++ |
| 521 | ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. |
| 522 | |
| 523 | The following functions are defined for hash tables: |
| 524 | |
| 525 | - Function: make-hash-table ARGS |
| 526 | |
| 527 | The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments |
| 528 | are optional. The following arguments are defined: |
| 529 | |
| 530 | :test TEST |
| 531 | |
| 532 | TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. |
| 533 | Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, |
| 534 | it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. |
| 535 | |
| 536 | :size SIZE |
| 537 | |
| 538 | SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how |
| 539 | many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. |
| 540 | |
| 541 | :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE |
| 542 | |
| 543 | REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes |
| 544 | full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old |
| 545 | size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > |
| 546 | 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the |
| 547 | old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. |
| 548 | |
| 549 | :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD |
| 550 | |
| 551 | THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the |
| 552 | hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / |
| 553 | (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. |
| 554 | |
| 555 | :weakness WEAK |
| 556 | |
| 557 | WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t. |
| 558 | Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if |
| 559 | their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the |
| 560 | hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. |
| 561 | |
| 562 | - Function: makehash &optional TEST |
| 563 | |
| 564 | Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. |
| 565 | |
| 566 | - Function: hash-table-p TABLE |
| 567 | |
| 568 | Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. |
| 569 | |
| 570 | - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE |
| 571 | |
| 572 | Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and |
| 573 | values are shared. |
| 574 | |
| 575 | - Function: hash-table-count TABLE |
| 576 | |
| 577 | Returns the number of entries in TABLE. |
| 578 | |
| 579 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
| 580 | |
| 581 | Returns the rehash size of TABLE. |
| 582 | |
| 583 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE |
| 584 | |
| 585 | Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. |
| 586 | |
| 587 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
| 588 | |
| 589 | Returns the size of TABLE. |
| 590 | |
| 591 | - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE |
| 592 | |
| 593 | Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. |
| 594 | |
| 595 | - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE |
| 596 | |
| 597 | Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. |
| 598 | |
| 599 | - Function: clrhash TABLE |
| 600 | |
| 601 | Clear TABLE. |
| 602 | |
| 603 | - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT |
| 604 | |
| 605 | Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if |
| 606 | not found. |
| 607 | |
| 608 | - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
| 609 | |
| 610 | Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with |
| 611 | another value, replace the old value with VALUE. |
| 612 | |
| 613 | - Function: remhash KEY TABLE |
| 614 | |
| 615 | Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. |
| 616 | |
| 617 | - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE |
| 618 | |
| 619 | Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two |
| 620 | arguments KEY and VALUE. |
| 621 | |
| 622 | - Function: sxhash OBJ |
| 623 | |
| 624 | Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. |
| 625 | |
| 626 | - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN |
| 627 | |
| 628 | Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as |
| 629 | a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for |
| 630 | comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
| 631 | and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
| 632 | of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). |
| 633 | |
| 634 | TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. |
| 635 | |
| 636 | HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash |
| 637 | code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of |
| 638 | integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. |
| 639 | |
| 640 | Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to |
| 641 | be strings that are compared case-insensitively. |
| 642 | |
| 643 | (defun case-fold-string= (a b) |
| 644 | (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) |
| 645 | |
| 646 | (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) |
| 647 | (sxhash (upcase a))) |
| 648 | |
| 649 | (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
| 650 | 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
| 651 | |
| 652 | (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) |
| 653 | |
| 654 | +++ |
| 655 | ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. |
| 656 | |
| 657 | It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent |
| 658 | circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents |
| 659 | a cons cell which is its own cdr. |
| 660 | |
| 661 | +++ |
| 662 | ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. |
| 663 | |
| 664 | If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs |
| 665 | #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. |
| 666 | |
| 667 | You can also do several calls to print functions using a common |
| 668 | set of #N= constructs; here is how. |
| 669 | |
| 670 | (let ((print-circle t) |
| 671 | (print-continuous-numbering t) |
| 672 | print-number-table) |
| 673 | (print1 ...) |
| 674 | (print1 ...) |
| 675 | ...) |
| 676 | |
| 677 | +++ |
| 678 | ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or |
| 679 | t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the |
| 680 | specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it |
| 681 | is too short to reach that column. |
| 682 | |
| 683 | +++ |
| 684 | ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may |
| 685 | now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION |
| 686 | after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with |
| 687 | two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. |
| 688 | |
| 689 | If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, |
| 690 | perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily |
| 691 | and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. |
| 692 | |
| 693 | +++ |
| 694 | ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument |
| 695 | to specify which buffer to return the size of. |
| 696 | |
| 697 | +++ |
| 698 | ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook |
| 699 | calendar-move-hook after moving point. |
| 700 | |
| 701 | +++ |
| 702 | ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a |
| 703 | directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be |
| 704 | small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If |
| 705 | small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use |
| 706 | temporary-file-directory instead. |
| 707 | |
| 708 | +++ |
| 709 | ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all |
| 710 | the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects |
| 711 | `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as |
| 712 | hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. |
| 713 | |
| 714 | +++ |
| 715 | ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
| 716 | elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. |
| 717 | |
| 718 | +++ |
| 719 | ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. |
| 720 | |
| 721 | make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually |
| 722 | creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, |
| 723 | ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. |
| 724 | |
| 725 | +++ |
| 726 | ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' |
| 727 | |
| 728 | The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists |
| 729 | on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW |
| 730 | is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; |
| 731 | never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means |
| 732 | ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and |
| 733 | overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. |
| 734 | |
| 735 | If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', |
| 736 | that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call |
| 737 | to get an error if the file exists at that time. |
| 738 | The error reported is `file-already-exists'. |
| 739 | |
| 740 | +++ |
| 741 | ** Function `format' now handles text properties. |
| 742 | |
| 743 | Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. |
| 744 | If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties |
| 745 | ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the |
| 746 | result string. |
| 747 | |
| 748 | Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result |
| 749 | string where arguments appear in the result string. |
| 750 | |
| 751 | Example: |
| 752 | |
| 753 | (let ((s1 "hello, %s") |
| 754 | (s2 "world")) |
| 755 | (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) |
| 756 | (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) |
| 757 | (format s1 s2) |
| 758 | |
| 759 | results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. |
| 760 | |
| 761 | +++ |
| 762 | ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. |
| 763 | |
| 764 | Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. |
| 765 | The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic |
| 766 | argument in it. |
| 767 | |
| 768 | (let ((msg "hello, %s!") |
| 769 | (arg "world")) |
| 770 | (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) |
| 771 | (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) |
| 772 | (message msg arg)) |
| 773 | |
| 774 | +++ |
| 775 | ** Sound support |
| 776 | |
| 777 | Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs |
| 778 | (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). |
| 779 | |
| 780 | Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio |
| 781 | (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' |
| 782 | to enable sound support. |
| 783 | |
| 784 | Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a |
| 785 | list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined |
| 786 | when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The |
| 787 | functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the |
| 788 | sound to play, before playing the sound. |
| 789 | |
| 790 | The following sound properties are supported: |
| 791 | |
| 792 | - `:file FILE' |
| 793 | |
| 794 | FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be |
| 795 | searched relative to `data-directory'. |
| 796 | |
| 797 | - `:volume VOLUME' |
| 798 | |
| 799 | VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range |
| 800 | 0..1. This property is optional. |
| 801 | |
| 802 | Other properties are ignored. |
| 803 | |
| 804 | ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
| 805 | \f |
| 806 | * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
| 807 | |
| 808 | Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. |
| 809 | --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. |
| 810 | When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- |
| 811 | so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. |
| 812 | |
| 813 | ** New face implementation. |
| 814 | |
| 815 | Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD |
| 816 | font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. |
| 817 | |
| 818 | +++ |
| 819 | *** New faces. |
| 820 | |
| 821 | Each face can specify the following display attributes: |
| 822 | |
| 823 | 1. Font family or fontset alias name. |
| 824 | |
| 825 | 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
| 826 | width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. |
| 827 | |
| 828 | 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
| 829 | |
| 830 | 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
| 831 | |
| 832 | 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
| 833 | |
| 834 | 6. Foreground color. |
| 835 | |
| 836 | 7. Background color. |
| 837 | |
| 838 | 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. |
| 839 | |
| 840 | 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. |
| 841 | |
| 842 | 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. |
| 843 | |
| 844 | 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. |
| 845 | |
| 846 | 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what |
| 847 | color. |
| 848 | |
| 849 | 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its |
| 850 | color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. |
| 851 | |
| 852 | Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the |
| 853 | same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different |
| 854 | frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named |
| 855 | faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector |
| 856 | with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face |
| 857 | attributes mentioned above. |
| 858 | |
| 859 | There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face |
| 860 | definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly |
| 861 | created frames. |
| 862 | |
| 863 | A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
| 864 | have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called |
| 865 | `fully-specified'. |
| 866 | |
| 867 | +++ |
| 868 | *** Face merging. |
| 869 | |
| 870 | The display style of a given character in the text is determined by |
| 871 | combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any |
| 872 | aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text |
| 873 | properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure |
| 874 | that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always |
| 875 | results in a fully-specified face. |
| 876 | |
| 877 | +++ |
| 878 | *** Face realization. |
| 879 | |
| 880 | After all face attributes for a character have been determined by |
| 881 | merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The |
| 882 | realization process maps face attributes to what is physically |
| 883 | available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized |
| 884 | face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face |
| 885 | cache of the frame on which it was realized. |
| 886 | |
| 887 | Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the |
| 888 | character to display because different fonts and encodings are used |
| 889 | for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different |
| 890 | charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. |
| 891 | |
| 892 | Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a |
| 893 | specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face |
| 894 | being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of |
| 895 | the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with |
| 896 | statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. |
| 897 | |
| 898 | In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function |
| 899 | `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > |
| 900 | 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from |
| 901 | the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is |
| 902 | initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for |
| 903 | Emacs. |
| 904 | |
| 905 | Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with |
| 906 | `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same |
| 907 | registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent |
| 908 | with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. |
| 909 | |
| 910 | ++++ |
| 911 | **** Clearing face caches. |
| 912 | |
| 913 | The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches |
| 914 | on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload |
| 915 | unused fonts. |
| 916 | |
| 917 | +++ |
| 918 | *** Font selection. |
| 919 | |
| 920 | Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
| 921 | given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently |
| 922 | for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. |
| 923 | |
| 924 | If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a |
| 925 | pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font |
| 926 | family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a |
| 927 | property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to |
| 928 | an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. |
| 929 | |
| 930 | Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched |
| 931 | against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best |
| 932 | match for the given face attributes in this font list. |
| 933 | |
| 934 | Font selection can be influenced by the user. |
| 935 | |
| 936 | The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face |
| 937 | attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting |
| 938 | face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute |
| 939 | names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means |
| 940 | that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font |
| 941 | width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries |
| 942 | to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. |
| 943 | |
| 944 | Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to |
| 945 | specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a |
| 946 | face doesn't exist. |
| 947 | |
| 948 | +++ |
| 949 | **** Scalable fonts |
| 950 | |
| 951 | Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, |
| 952 | since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 |
| 953 | servers. |
| 954 | |
| 955 | To enable scalable font use, set the variable |
| 956 | `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means nver use |
| 957 | scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
| 958 | Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A |
| 959 | scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from |
| 960 | that list. Example: |
| 961 | |
| 962 | (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) |
| 963 | |
| 964 | allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. |
| 965 | |
| 966 | +++ |
| 967 | *** Functions and variables related to font selection. |
| 968 | |
| 969 | - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME |
| 970 | |
| 971 | Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY |
| 972 | is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a |
| 973 | string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. |
| 974 | |
| 975 | If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of |
| 976 | the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P |
| 977 | FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. |
| 978 | POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and |
| 979 | SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. |
| 980 | These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil |
| 981 | if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and |
| 982 | REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of |
| 983 | the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting |
| 984 | of the face font sort order. |
| 985 | |
| 986 | - Function: x-font-family-list |
| 987 | |
| 988 | Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is |
| 989 | omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses |
| 990 | (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is |
| 991 | non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. |
| 992 | |
| 993 | - Variable: font-list-limit |
| 994 | |
| 995 | Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions |
| 996 | won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a |
| 997 | matching font. The default is currently 100. |
| 998 | |
| 999 | +++ |
| 1000 | *** Setting face attributes. |
| 1001 | |
| 1002 | For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible |
| 1003 | with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now |
| 1004 | implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and |
| 1005 | `face-attribute'. |
| 1006 | |
| 1007 | Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword |
| 1008 | symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. |
| 1009 | |
| 1010 | The following attributes are recognized: |
| 1011 | |
| 1012 | `:family' |
| 1013 | |
| 1014 | VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', |
| 1015 | or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' |
| 1016 | and `?' are allowed. |
| 1017 | |
| 1018 | `:width' |
| 1019 | |
| 1020 | VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. |
| 1021 | It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', |
| 1022 | `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', |
| 1023 | `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. |
| 1024 | |
| 1025 | `:height' |
| 1026 | |
| 1027 | VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in |
| 1028 | 1/10 pt. |
| 1029 | |
| 1030 | `:weight' |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 | VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the |
| 1033 | symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', |
| 1034 | `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. |
| 1035 | |
| 1036 | `:slant' |
| 1037 | |
| 1038 | VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the |
| 1039 | symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or |
| 1040 | `reverse-oblique'. |
| 1041 | |
| 1042 | `:foreground', `:background' |
| 1043 | |
| 1044 | VALUE must be a color name, a string. |
| 1045 | |
| 1046 | `:underline' |
| 1047 | |
| 1048 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If |
| 1049 | VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is |
| 1050 | a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly |
| 1051 | don't underline. |
| 1052 | |
| 1053 | `:overline' |
| 1054 | |
| 1055 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If |
| 1056 | VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a |
| 1057 | string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't |
| 1058 | overline. |
| 1059 | |
| 1060 | `:strike-through' |
| 1061 | |
| 1062 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line |
| 1063 | striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the |
| 1064 | face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE |
| 1065 | is nil, explicitly don't strike through. |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 | `:box' |
| 1068 | |
| 1069 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn |
| 1070 | around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If |
| 1071 | VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color |
| 1072 | of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, |
| 1073 | and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, |
| 1074 | VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH |
| 1075 | :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from |
| 1076 | the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as |
| 1077 | specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it |
| 1078 | defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is |
| 1079 | the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background |
| 1080 | color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box |
| 1081 | should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking |
| 1082 | like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box |
| 1083 | that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if |
| 1084 | the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D |
| 1085 | box. |
| 1086 | |
| 1087 | `:inverse-video' |
| 1088 | |
| 1089 | VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in |
| 1090 | inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. |
| 1091 | |
| 1092 | `:stipple' |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 | If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. |
| 1095 | The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are |
| 1096 | searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH |
| 1097 | HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA |
| 1098 | is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means |
| 1099 | explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. |
| 1100 | |
| 1101 | For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', |
| 1102 | and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: |
| 1103 | |
| 1104 | `:font' |
| 1105 | |
| 1106 | Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid |
| 1107 | XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font |
| 1108 | is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous |
| 1109 | versions of Emacs. |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 | For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can |
| 1112 | be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE |
| 1113 | must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." |
| 1114 | |
| 1115 | Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and |
| 1116 | `defface'. |
| 1117 | |
| 1118 | *** Face attributes and X resources |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 | The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes |
| 1121 | from X resources: |
| 1122 | |
| 1123 | Face attribute X resource class |
| 1124 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1125 | :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily |
| 1126 | :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth |
| 1127 | :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight |
| 1128 | :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight |
| 1129 | :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant |
| 1130 | foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground |
| 1131 | :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground |
| 1132 | :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline |
| 1133 | :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough |
| 1134 | :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox |
| 1135 | :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline |
| 1136 | :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse |
| 1137 | :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple |
| 1138 | or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 1139 | Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
| 1140 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
| 1141 | :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold |
| 1142 | :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic |
| 1143 | :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
| 1144 | |
| 1145 | +++ |
| 1146 | *** Text property `face'. |
| 1147 | |
| 1148 | The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face |
| 1149 | specification or a list of such specifications. Each face |
| 1150 | specification can be |
| 1151 | |
| 1152 | 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. |
| 1153 | |
| 1154 | 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each |
| 1155 | KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value |
| 1156 | for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' |
| 1157 | for face attribute names. |
| 1158 | |
| 1159 | 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or |
| 1160 | (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is |
| 1161 | for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. |
| 1162 | |
| 1163 | +++ |
| 1164 | ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. |
| 1165 | |
| 1166 | The function `face-register-tty-color' can be used to define colors |
| 1167 | for use on TTY frames. It maps a color name to a color number on the |
| 1168 | terminal. Emacs defines a couple of default color mappings by |
| 1169 | default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
| 1170 | `tty-defined-colors'. The function `face-clear-tty-colors' can be |
| 1171 | used to clear the mapping table. |
| 1172 | |
| 1173 | +++ |
| 1174 | ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. |
| 1175 | This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
| 1176 | |
| 1177 | A number of functions such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
| 1178 | forward-paragraph, and beginning-of-line, stop moving when they |
| 1179 | come to the boundary between the prompt and the actual contents. |
| 1180 | The function erase-buffer does not delete the prompt. |
| 1181 | |
| 1182 | The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the |
| 1183 | end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
| 1184 | Otherwise, it returns zero. |
| 1185 | |
| 1186 | The function buffer-string does not return the portion of the |
| 1187 | mini-buffer belonging to the prompt; buffer-substring does. |
| 1188 | |
| 1189 | +++ |
| 1190 | ** Image support. |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 | Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving |
| 1193 | strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of |
| 1194 | (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value |
| 1195 | replaces the display of the characters having that property. |
| 1196 | |
| 1197 | If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of |
| 1198 | `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If |
| 1199 | AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a |
| 1200 | window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal |
| 1201 | area. |
| 1202 | |
| 1203 | IMAGE is an image specification. |
| 1204 | |
| 1205 | *** Image specifications |
| 1206 | |
| 1207 | Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS |
| 1208 | is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each |
| 1209 | specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a |
| 1210 | symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. |
| 1211 | |
| 1212 | The following is a list of properties all image types share. |
| 1213 | |
| 1214 | `:ascent ASCENT' |
| 1215 | |
| 1216 | ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage |
| 1217 | of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50. |
| 1218 | |
| 1219 | `:margin MARGIN' |
| 1220 | |
| 1221 | MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as |
| 1222 | margin around the image. Default is 0. |
| 1223 | |
| 1224 | `:relief RELIEF' |
| 1225 | |
| 1226 | RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief |
| 1227 | around an image. |
| 1228 | |
| 1229 | `:algorithm ALGO' |
| 1230 | |
| 1231 | Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must |
| 1232 | be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is |
| 1233 | supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image |
| 1234 | which is intended to display images "disabled." |
| 1235 | |
| 1236 | `:heuristic-mask BG' |
| 1237 | |
| 1238 | If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the |
| 1239 | background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t, |
| 1240 | determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4 |
| 1241 | corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from |
| 1242 | the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must |
| 1243 | be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the |
| 1244 | background of the image. |
| 1245 | |
| 1246 | `:file FILE' |
| 1247 | |
| 1248 | Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, |
| 1249 | search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support |
| 1250 | building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property |
| 1251 | may be present in the image specification. |
| 1252 | |
| 1253 | |
| 1254 | *** Supported image types |
| 1255 | |
| 1256 | **** XBM, iamge type `xbm'. |
| 1257 | |
| 1258 | XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image |
| 1259 | properties supported are |
| 1260 | |
| 1261 | `:foreground FG' |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 | FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default |
| 1264 | is the frame's foreground. |
| 1265 | |
| 1266 | `:background FG' |
| 1267 | |
| 1268 | BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is |
| 1269 | the frame's background color. |
| 1270 | |
| 1271 | XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this |
| 1272 | case, the image specification must contain the following properties |
| 1273 | instead of a `:file' property. |
| 1274 | |
| 1275 | `:width WIDTH' |
| 1276 | |
| 1277 | WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. |
| 1278 | |
| 1279 | `:height HEIGHT' |
| 1280 | |
| 1281 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. |
| 1282 | |
| 1283 | `:data DATA' |
| 1284 | |
| 1285 | DATA must be either |
| 1286 | |
| 1287 | 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must |
| 1288 | have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT |
| 1289 | |
| 1290 | 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT |
| 1291 | |
| 1292 | 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the |
| 1293 | bitmap. |
| 1294 | |
| 1295 | **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
| 1296 | |
| 1297 | XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package |
| 1298 | `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is |
| 1299 | found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via |
| 1300 | `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. |
| 1301 | |
| 1302 | Additional image properties supported are: |
| 1303 | |
| 1304 | `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' |
| 1305 | |
| 1306 | SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the |
| 1307 | name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color |
| 1308 | name. |
| 1309 | |
| 1310 | XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, |
| 1311 | add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. |
| 1312 | |
| 1313 | `:data DATA' |
| 1314 | |
| 1315 | DATA must be a string containing an XPM image. The contents of the |
| 1316 | string are of the same format as that of XPM files. |
| 1317 | |
| 1318 | The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
| 1319 | to display compressed images. |
| 1320 | |
| 1321 | **** PBM, image type `pbm' |
| 1322 | |
| 1323 | PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and |
| 1324 | mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties |
| 1325 | defined. |
| 1326 | |
| 1327 | **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' |
| 1328 | |
| 1329 | Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', |
| 1330 | package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
| 1331 | properties defined. |
| 1332 | |
| 1333 | **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
| 1334 | |
| 1335 | Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', |
| 1336 | package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
| 1337 | properties defined. |
| 1338 | |
| 1339 | **** GIF, image type `gif' |
| 1340 | |
| 1341 | Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package |
| 1342 | `libungif-4.1.0', or later. |
| 1343 | |
| 1344 | Additional image properties supported are: |
| 1345 | |
| 1346 | `:index INDEX' |
| 1347 | |
| 1348 | INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a |
| 1349 | multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large. |
| 1350 | |
| 1351 | This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. |
| 1352 | For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file |
| 1353 | at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images |
| 1354 | every 0.1 seconds. |
| 1355 | |
| 1356 | (defun show-anim (file max) |
| 1357 | "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." |
| 1358 | (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) |
| 1359 | |
| 1360 | (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) |
| 1361 | (when (= idx max) |
| 1362 | (setq idx 0)) |
| 1363 | (let ((img (create-image file nil :index idx))) |
| 1364 | (save-excursion |
| 1365 | (set-buffer buffer) |
| 1366 | (goto-char (point-min)) |
| 1367 | (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) |
| 1368 | (insert-image img "x")) |
| 1369 | (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) |
| 1370 | |
| 1371 | **** PNG, image type `png' |
| 1372 | |
| 1373 | Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', |
| 1374 | package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
| 1375 | properties defined. |
| 1376 | |
| 1377 | **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. |
| 1378 | |
| 1379 | Additional image properties supported are: |
| 1380 | |
| 1381 | `:pt-width WIDTH' |
| 1382 | |
| 1383 | WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an |
| 1384 | integer. This is an required property. |
| 1385 | |
| 1386 | `:pt-height HEIGHT' |
| 1387 | |
| 1388 | HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT |
| 1389 | must be an integer. This is an required property. |
| 1390 | |
| 1391 | `:bounding-box BOX' |
| 1392 | |
| 1393 | BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of |
| 1394 | the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS |
| 1395 | files. This is an required property. |
| 1396 | |
| 1397 | Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See |
| 1398 | lisp/gs.el. |
| 1399 | |
| 1400 | *** Lisp interface. |
| 1401 | |
| 1402 | The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
| 1403 | which are supported in the current configuration. |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 | Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when |
| 1406 | they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. |
| 1407 | The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache |
| 1408 | manually. |
| 1409 | |
| 1410 | *** Simplified image API, image.el |
| 1411 | |
| 1412 | The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image |
| 1413 | creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' |
| 1414 | can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to |
| 1415 | define an image based on available image types. The functions |
| 1416 | `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a |
| 1417 | buffer. |
| 1418 | |
| 1419 | +++ |
| 1420 | ** Display margins. |
| 1421 | |
| 1422 | Windows can now have margins which are used for special text |
| 1423 | and images. |
| 1424 | |
| 1425 | To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables |
| 1426 | `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call |
| 1427 | `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to |
| 1428 | obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and |
| 1429 | `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying |
| 1430 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update |
| 1431 | of the display margins. |
| 1432 | |
| 1433 | You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property |
| 1434 | containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is |
| 1435 | one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a |
| 1436 | string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later |
| 1437 | in this file). |
| 1438 | |
| 1439 | +++ |
| 1440 | ** Help display |
| 1441 | |
| 1442 | Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse |
| 1443 | moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property |
| 1444 | `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line |
| 1445 | that have a `help-echo' property. |
| 1446 | |
| 1447 | The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar |
| 1448 | items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display. |
| 1449 | If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is |
| 1450 | evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the |
| 1451 | tool-bar item is used. |
| 1452 | |
| 1453 | The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays |
| 1454 | help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the |
| 1455 | help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
| 1456 | |
| 1457 | +++ |
| 1458 | ** Vertical fractional scrolling. |
| 1459 | |
| 1460 | The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. |
| 1461 | This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. |
| 1462 | |
| 1463 | The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical |
| 1464 | scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. |
| 1465 | The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical |
| 1466 | scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be |
| 1467 | used. |
| 1468 | |
| 1469 | (global-set-key [A-down] |
| 1470 | #'(lambda () |
| 1471 | (interactive) |
| 1472 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 1473 | (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
| 1474 | (global-set-key [A-up] |
| 1475 | #'(lambda () |
| 1476 | (interactive) |
| 1477 | (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
| 1478 | (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 | +++ |
| 1481 | ** New hook `fontification-functions'. |
| 1482 | |
| 1483 | Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay |
| 1484 | when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This |
| 1485 | variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function |
| 1486 | is called with one argument, POS. |
| 1487 | |
| 1488 | At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more |
| 1489 | characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them |
| 1490 | as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text |
| 1491 | property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the |
| 1492 | `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. |
| 1493 | |
| 1494 | +++ |
| 1495 | ** Tool bar support. |
| 1496 | |
| 1497 | Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame |
| 1498 | parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") |
| 1499 | controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value |
| 1500 | suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and |
| 1501 | `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed |
| 1502 | automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. |
| 1503 | |
| 1504 | *** Tool bar item definitions |
| 1505 | |
| 1506 | Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
| 1507 | `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' |
| 1508 | where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. |
| 1509 | |
| 1510 | CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
| 1511 | evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in |
| 1512 | the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' |
| 1513 | property (see below). |
| 1514 | |
| 1515 | BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
| 1516 | binding are currently ignored. |
| 1517 | |
| 1518 | The following properties are recognized: |
| 1519 | |
| 1520 | `:enable FORM'. |
| 1521 | |
| 1522 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
| 1523 | or disabled. |
| 1524 | |
| 1525 | `:visible FORM' |
| 1526 | |
| 1527 | FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
| 1528 | |
| 1529 | `:filter FUNCTION' |
| 1530 | |
| 1531 | FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which |
| 1532 | FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is |
| 1533 | used instead of BINDING to display this item. |
| 1534 | |
| 1535 | `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
| 1536 | |
| 1537 | TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated |
| 1538 | and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. |
| 1539 | |
| 1540 | `:image IMAGES' |
| 1541 | |
| 1542 | IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four |
| 1543 | image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the |
| 1544 | meaning of each of the four elements: |
| 1545 | |
| 1546 | Index Use when item is |
| 1547 | ---------------------------------------- |
| 1548 | 0 enabled and selected |
| 1549 | 1 enabled and deselected |
| 1550 | 2 disabled and selected |
| 1551 | 3 disabled and deselected |
| 1552 | |
| 1553 | `:help HELP-STRING'. |
| 1554 | |
| 1555 | Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
| 1556 | is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. |
| 1557 | |
| 1558 | *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
| 1559 | |
| 1560 | If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically |
| 1561 | resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger |
| 1562 | than 1/4 of the frame's size. |
| 1563 | |
| 1564 | If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
| 1565 | raised when the mouse moves over them. |
| 1566 | |
| 1567 | You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting |
| 1568 | `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of |
| 1569 | pixels. Default is 1. |
| 1570 | |
| 1571 | You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting |
| 1572 | `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. |
| 1573 | |
| 1574 | *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. |
| 1575 | |
| 1576 | You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on |
| 1577 | a tool bar item. If |
| 1578 | |
| 1579 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] |
| 1580 | '(menu-item "Shell" shell |
| 1581 | :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) |
| 1582 | |
| 1583 | is the original tool bar item definition, then |
| 1584 | |
| 1585 | (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) |
| 1586 | |
| 1587 | makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same |
| 1588 | item. |
| 1589 | |
| 1590 | ** Mode line changes. |
| 1591 | |
| 1592 | +++ |
| 1593 | *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 | The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there |
| 1596 | that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display |
| 1597 | a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. |
| 1598 | |
| 1599 | 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has |
| 1600 | a `local-map' text property. |
| 1601 | |
| 1602 | 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and |
| 1603 | that format specifier has a `local-map' property. |
| 1604 | |
| 1605 | 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM |
| 1606 | is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a |
| 1607 | `local-map' property. |
| 1608 | |
| 1609 | The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' |
| 1610 | properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an |
| 1611 | example. |
| 1612 | |
| 1613 | +++ |
| 1614 | *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local |
| 1615 | variable mode-line-format to nil. |
| 1616 | |
| 1617 | +++ |
| 1618 | *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. |
| 1619 | |
| 1620 | This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable |
| 1621 | `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are |
| 1622 | completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and |
| 1623 | `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top |
| 1624 | line. |
| 1625 | |
| 1626 | The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face |
| 1627 | `header-line'. |
| 1628 | |
| 1629 | The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a |
| 1630 | position in the header-line. |
| 1631 | |
| 1632 | +++ |
| 1633 | ** Text property `display' |
| 1634 | |
| 1635 | The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and |
| 1636 | also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the |
| 1637 | `display' property should be a display specification, as described |
| 1638 | below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
| 1639 | |
| 1640 | *** Variable width and height spaces |
| 1641 | |
| 1642 | To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display |
| 1643 | specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is |
| 1644 | `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal |
| 1645 | area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right |
| 1646 | marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is |
| 1647 | displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
| 1648 | simpler form STRETCH as property value. |
| 1649 | |
| 1650 | The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space |
| 1651 | PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the |
| 1652 | properties described below. |
| 1653 | |
| 1654 | The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the |
| 1655 | characters having the `display' property. |
| 1656 | |
| 1657 | - :width WIDTH |
| 1658 | |
| 1659 | Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal |
| 1660 | character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. |
| 1661 | |
| 1662 | - :relative-width FACTOR |
| 1663 | |
| 1664 | Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the |
| 1665 | first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the |
| 1666 | same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the |
| 1667 | width of that character by FACTOR. |
| 1668 | |
| 1669 | - :align-to HPOS |
| 1670 | |
| 1671 | Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The |
| 1672 | value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. |
| 1673 | |
| 1674 | Exactly one of the above properties should be used. |
| 1675 | |
| 1676 | - :height HEIGHT |
| 1677 | |
| 1678 | Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the |
| 1679 | normal line height. |
| 1680 | |
| 1681 | - :relative-height FACTOR |
| 1682 | |
| 1683 | The height of the space is computed as the product of the height |
| 1684 | of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. |
| 1685 | |
| 1686 | - :ascent ASCENT |
| 1687 | |
| 1688 | Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be |
| 1689 | used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the |
| 1690 | baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or |
| 1691 | equal to 100. |
| 1692 | |
| 1693 | You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. |
| 1694 | |
| 1695 | *** Images |
| 1696 | |
| 1697 | A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION |
| 1698 | . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, |
| 1699 | in the display, the characters having this display specification in |
| 1700 | their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', |
| 1701 | the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is |
| 1702 | `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal |
| 1703 | area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in |
| 1704 | the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE |
| 1705 | as display specification. |
| 1706 | |
| 1707 | *** Other display properties |
| 1708 | |
| 1709 | - :space-width FACTOR |
| 1710 | |
| 1711 | Specifies that space characters in the text having that property |
| 1712 | should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an |
| 1713 | integer or float. |
| 1714 | |
| 1715 | - :height HEIGHT |
| 1716 | |
| 1717 | Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. |
| 1718 | |
| 1719 | If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that |
| 1720 | means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of |
| 1721 | the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A |
| 1722 | ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which |
| 1723 | a font is available counts as a step. |
| 1724 | |
| 1725 | If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times |
| 1726 | as tall as the frame's default font. |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 | If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current |
| 1729 | height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. |
| 1730 | |
| 1731 | Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol |
| 1732 | `height' bound to the current specified font height. |
| 1733 | |
| 1734 | - :raise FACTOR |
| 1735 | |
| 1736 | FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current |
| 1737 | font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters |
| 1738 | raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The |
| 1739 | amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the |
| 1740 | `:height' subproperty. |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | *** Conditional display properties |
| 1743 | |
| 1744 | All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification |
| 1745 | has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC |
| 1746 | applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. |
| 1747 | During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of |
| 1748 | the text having the `display' property. |
| 1749 | |
| 1750 | The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to |
| 1751 | `(:when t SPEC)'. |
| 1752 | |
| 1753 | +++ |
| 1754 | ** New menu separator types. |
| 1755 | |
| 1756 | Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with |
| 1757 | item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are |
| 1758 | treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used |
| 1759 | to specify other menu separator types. |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 | - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' |
| 1762 | |
| 1763 | No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the |
| 1764 | separator occurs. |
| 1765 | |
| 1766 | - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' |
| 1767 | |
| 1768 | A single line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 1769 | |
| 1770 | - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' |
| 1771 | |
| 1772 | A double line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 1773 | |
| 1774 | - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' |
| 1775 | |
| 1776 | A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 1777 | |
| 1778 | - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' |
| 1779 | |
| 1780 | A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
| 1781 | |
| 1782 | - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' |
| 1783 | |
| 1784 | A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form |
| 1785 | displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
| 1786 | |
| 1787 | - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' |
| 1788 | |
| 1789 | A single line with 3D raised appearance. |
| 1790 | |
| 1791 | - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' |
| 1792 | |
| 1793 | A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. |
| 1794 | |
| 1795 | - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' |
| 1796 | |
| 1797 | A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. |
| 1798 | |
| 1799 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 | Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
| 1802 | |
| 1803 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' |
| 1804 | |
| 1805 | Two lines with 3D raised appearance. |
| 1806 | |
| 1807 | - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' |
| 1808 | |
| 1809 | Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
| 1810 | |
| 1811 | - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' |
| 1812 | |
| 1813 | Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. |
| 1814 | |
| 1815 | Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like |
| 1816 | the corresponding single-line separators. |
| 1817 | |
| 1818 | +++ |
| 1819 | ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. |
| 1820 | |
| 1821 | The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
| 1822 | `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. |
| 1823 | Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify |
| 1824 | that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, |
| 1825 | default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the |
| 1826 | default background is the background color of the frame, and the |
| 1827 | default foreground is black. |
| 1828 | |
| 1829 | The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' |
| 1830 | (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class |
| 1831 | `ScrollBarBackground'). |
| 1832 | |
| 1833 | Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource |
| 1834 | settings for scroll bar colors. |
| 1835 | |
| 1836 | +++ |
| 1837 | ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent |
| 1838 | display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. |
| 1839 | |
| 1840 | --- |
| 1841 | ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it |
| 1842 | starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based |
| 1843 | on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued |
| 1844 | line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from |
| 1845 | the original window start. |
| 1846 | |
| 1847 | --- |
| 1848 | ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions |
| 1849 | `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed |
| 1850 | now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. |
| 1851 | |
| 1852 | +++ |
| 1853 | ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. |
| 1854 | |
| 1855 | A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable |
| 1856 | `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes |
| 1857 | windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any |
| 1858 | other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. |
| 1859 | |
| 1860 | The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer |
| 1861 | fixed-width and fixed-height. |
| 1862 | |
| 1863 | (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) |
| 1864 | |
| 1865 | A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is |
| 1866 | fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the |
| 1867 | window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To |
| 1868 | change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' |
| 1869 | temporarily to nil, for example |
| 1870 | |
| 1871 | (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) |
| 1872 | (enlarge-window 10)) |
| 1873 | |
| 1874 | Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
| 1875 | or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
| 1876 | \f |
| 1877 | * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
| 1878 | |
| 1879 | ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. |
| 1880 | |
| 1881 | You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. |
| 1882 | Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name |
| 1883 | `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. |
| 1884 | |
| 1885 | If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file |
| 1886 | is the one that is used. |
| 1887 | |
| 1888 | ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return |
| 1889 | the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). |
| 1890 | Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, |
| 1891 | separate from the command's regular output. |
| 1892 | Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer |
| 1893 | says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. |
| 1894 | In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies |
| 1895 | the buffer name. |
| 1896 | |
| 1897 | When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error |
| 1898 | output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate |
| 1899 | it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not |
| 1900 | cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. |
| 1901 | |
| 1902 | ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in |
| 1903 | the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, |
| 1904 | is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers |
| 1905 | created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. |
| 1906 | |
| 1907 | ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For |
| 1908 | example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names |
| 1909 | match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the |
| 1910 | quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 | ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches |
| 1913 | now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: |
| 1914 | if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then |
| 1915 | they never ignore case. |
| 1916 | |
| 1917 | ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned |
| 1918 | under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually |
| 1919 | applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents |
| 1920 | of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or |
| 1921 | just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs |
| 1922 | convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a |
| 1923 | part of the general feature of coding system conversion. |
| 1924 | |
| 1925 | If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to |
| 1926 | the same format that was used in the file before. |
| 1927 | |
| 1928 | You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable |
| 1929 | `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. |
| 1930 | |
| 1931 | ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been |
| 1932 | renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. |
| 1933 | This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 | ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. |
| 1936 | The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a |
| 1937 | buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for |
| 1938 | your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format |
| 1939 | is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual |
| 1940 | end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for |
| 1941 | Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, |
| 1944 | eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, |
| 1945 | control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line |
| 1946 | format. You can now customize these variables. |
| 1947 | |
| 1948 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a |
| 1949 | filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a |
| 1950 | filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of |
| 1951 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. |
| 1952 | |
| 1953 | ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode |
| 1954 | in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given |
| 1955 | windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 | ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function |
| 1958 | dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file |
| 1959 | doesn't have any effect. |
| 1960 | |
| 1961 | ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, |
| 1962 | not one per buffer. |
| 1963 | |
| 1964 | ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to |
| 1965 | use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: |
| 1966 | (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) |
| 1967 | |
| 1968 | ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. |
| 1969 | To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the |
| 1970 | `auto-show-mode' command. |
| 1971 | |
| 1972 | ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to |
| 1973 | avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous |
| 1974 | versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font |
| 1975 | choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change |
| 1976 | occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. |
| 1977 | |
| 1978 | ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's |
| 1979 | cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. |
| 1980 | |
| 1981 | ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the |
| 1982 | character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this |
| 1983 | feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. |
| 1984 | |
| 1985 | ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at |
| 1986 | the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an |
| 1987 | interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode |
| 1988 | and variable specification, as well as on the first line. |
| 1989 | |
| 1990 | ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. |
| 1991 | |
| 1992 | The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system |
| 1993 | that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and |
| 1994 | one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that |
| 1995 | codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character |
| 1996 | set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. |
| 1997 | |
| 1998 | Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates |
| 1999 | from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. |
| 2000 | |
| 2001 | IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have |
| 2002 | equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to |
| 2003 | a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to |
| 2004 | `?' on other systems. |
| 2005 | |
| 2006 | IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this |
| 2007 | feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on |
| 2008 | Unix. |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 | Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the |
| 2011 | current codepage when it starts. |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 | ** Mail changes |
| 2014 | |
| 2015 | *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
| 2016 | default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than |
| 2017 | default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than |
| 2018 | sendmail-coding-system and the local value of |
| 2019 | buffer-file-coding-system. |
| 2020 | |
| 2021 | You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set |
| 2022 | sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing |
| 2023 | mail. |
| 2024 | |
| 2025 | *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, |
| 2026 | if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, |
| 2027 | Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a |
| 2028 | list of possible coding systems. |
| 2029 | |
| 2030 | ** CC Mode changes |
| 2031 | |
| 2032 | *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major |
| 2033 | modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no |
| 2034 | longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's |
| 2035 | docstring for details. |
| 2036 | |
| 2037 | *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic |
| 2038 | symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is |
| 2039 | found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a |
| 2040 | prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied |
| 2041 | lineup functions use this feature currently. |
| 2042 | |
| 2043 | *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and |
| 2044 | "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. |
| 2045 | |
| 2046 | *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for |
| 2047 | "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. |
| 2048 | |
| 2049 | *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately |
| 2050 | from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new |
| 2051 | symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on |
| 2052 | c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for |
| 2053 | anonymous classes. |
| 2054 | |
| 2055 | *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific |
| 2056 | syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont |
| 2057 | |
| 2058 | *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol |
| 2059 | inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike |
| 2060 | support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup |
| 2061 | function c-lineup-inexpr-block. |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 | *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists |
| 2064 | (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open |
| 2065 | brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. |
| 2066 | c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces |
| 2067 | (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). |
| 2068 | |
| 2069 | *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. |
| 2070 | |
| 2071 | *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. |
| 2072 | |
| 2073 | *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) |
| 2074 | for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. |
| 2075 | |
| 2076 | *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. |
| 2077 | |
| 2078 | *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation |
| 2079 | associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. |
| 2080 | This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some |
| 2081 | circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the |
| 2082 | class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). |
| 2083 | |
| 2084 | ** Gnus changes. |
| 2085 | |
| 2086 | *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been |
| 2087 | added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the |
| 2088 | Gnus manual for the full story. |
| 2089 | |
| 2090 | *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than |
| 2091 | before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft |
| 2092 | group, which is created automatically. |
| 2093 | |
| 2094 | *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header |
| 2095 | values. |
| 2096 | |
| 2097 | *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. |
| 2098 | |
| 2099 | *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message |
| 2100 | outside the region: `C-c C-v'. |
| 2101 | |
| 2102 | *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with |
| 2103 | `C-u C-c C-c'. |
| 2104 | |
| 2105 | *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. |
| 2106 | |
| 2107 | *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit |
| 2108 | re-highlighting of the article buffer. |
| 2109 | |
| 2110 | *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. |
| 2111 | |
| 2112 | *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic |
| 2113 | Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. |
| 2114 | |
| 2115 | *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix |
| 2116 | `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. |
| 2117 | |
| 2118 | *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater |
| 2119 | control over simplification. |
| 2120 | |
| 2121 | *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. |
| 2122 | |
| 2123 | *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the |
| 2124 | limit. |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 | *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. |
| 2127 | |
| 2128 | *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. |
| 2129 | |
| 2130 | *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
| 2131 | If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
| 2132 | rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. |
| 2133 | |
| 2134 | *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
| 2135 | `a' forces normal posting method. |
| 2136 | |
| 2137 | *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text |
| 2138 | -- `W d'. |
| 2139 | |
| 2140 | *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' |
| 2141 | to a non-nil value. |
| 2142 | |
| 2143 | *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling |
| 2144 | where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. |
| 2145 | |
| 2146 | *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer |
| 2147 | has been added. |
| 2148 | |
| 2149 | *** A history of where mails have been split is available. |
| 2150 | |
| 2151 | *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. |
| 2152 | |
| 2153 | *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting |
| 2154 | `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. |
| 2155 | |
| 2156 | *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- |
| 2157 | `message-cite-original-without-signature'. |
| 2158 | |
| 2159 | *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. |
| 2160 | |
| 2161 | *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has |
| 2162 | been added. |
| 2163 | |
| 2164 | *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the |
| 2165 | `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. |
| 2166 | |
| 2167 | *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually |
| 2168 | updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. |
| 2169 | |
| 2170 | *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. |
| 2171 | |
| 2172 | *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. |
| 2173 | |
| 2174 | *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. |
| 2175 | |
| 2176 | ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode |
| 2177 | |
| 2178 | *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give |
| 2179 | options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in |
| 2180 | nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". |
| 2181 | |
| 2182 | *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a |
| 2183 | TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some |
| 2184 | of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run |
| 2185 | TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you |
| 2186 | can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. |
| 2187 | |
| 2188 | *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. |
| 2189 | All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available |
| 2190 | but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use |
| 2191 | the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. |
| 2192 | |
| 2193 | *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check |
| 2194 | the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* |
| 2195 | buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular |
| 2196 | mismatch. |
| 2197 | |
| 2198 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 2199 | |
| 2200 | *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and |
| 2201 | file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. |
| 2202 | |
| 2203 | *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now |
| 2204 | lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 |
| 2205 | characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be |
| 2206 | removed from the label. |
| 2207 | |
| 2208 | *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use |
| 2209 | a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. |
| 2210 | |
| 2211 | *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the |
| 2212 | customization group `reftex-finding-files'. |
| 2213 | |
| 2214 | *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to |
| 2215 | `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular |
| 2216 | expressions. |
| 2217 | |
| 2218 | *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. |
| 2219 | |
| 2220 | ** New/deleted modes and packages |
| 2221 | |
| 2222 | *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and |
| 2223 | SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. |
| 2224 | |
| 2225 | *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for |
| 2226 | editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with |
| 2227 | SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 | *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer |
| 2230 | changes with a special face. |
| 2231 | |
| 2232 | *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and |
| 2233 | this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use |
| 2234 | Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. |
| 2235 | \f |
| 2236 | * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
| 2237 | |
| 2238 | ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. |
| 2239 | This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, |
| 2240 | conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, |
| 2241 | and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, |
| 2242 | check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. |
| 2243 | |
| 2244 | The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds |
| 2245 | Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim |
| 2246 | distribution when the config.bat script is run. |
| 2247 | |
| 2248 | ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on |
| 2249 | MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it |
| 2250 | controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written |
| 2251 | directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of |
| 2252 | Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing |
| 2253 | on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a |
| 2254 | string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external |
| 2255 | program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of |
| 2256 | printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) |
| 2257 | |
| 2258 | ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript |
| 2259 | output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs |
| 2260 | available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard |
| 2261 | input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a |
| 2262 | temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external |
| 2263 | program. |
| 2264 | |
| 2265 | An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, |
| 2266 | and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these |
| 2267 | programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax |
| 2268 | automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name |
| 2269 | as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is |
| 2270 | ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. |
| 2271 | |
| 2272 | ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has |
| 2273 | a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on |
| 2274 | MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but |
| 2275 | was not documented clearly before. |
| 2276 | |
| 2277 | ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. |
| 2278 | This includes Tetris and Snake. |
| 2279 | \f |
| 2280 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
| 2281 | |
| 2282 | ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position |
| 2283 | return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. |
| 2284 | They both accept an optional argument, which has the same |
| 2285 | meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. |
| 2286 | |
| 2287 | ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument |
| 2288 | WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, |
| 2289 | and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. |
| 2290 | |
| 2291 | ** Changes in the file-attributes function. |
| 2292 | |
| 2293 | *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. |
| 2294 | It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. |
| 2295 | |
| 2296 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
| 2297 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two |
| 2298 | integers. |
| 2299 | |
| 2300 | ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of |
| 2301 | files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same |
| 2302 | arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that |
| 2303 | file names and attributes are returned. |
| 2304 | |
| 2305 | ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for |
| 2306 | sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It |
| 2307 | accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes. |
| 2308 | It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
| 2309 | returns the result. |
| 2310 | |
| 2311 | ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern |
| 2312 | to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. |
| 2313 | |
| 2314 | ** New functions for base64 conversion: |
| 2315 | |
| 2316 | The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer |
| 2317 | into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region |
| 2318 | performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported |
| 2319 | optionally. |
| 2320 | |
| 2321 | Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar |
| 2322 | job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. |
| 2323 | |
| 2324 | ** |
| 2325 | The new function process-running-child-p |
| 2326 | will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its |
| 2327 | terminal to its own child process. |
| 2328 | |
| 2329 | ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: |
| 2330 | when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal |
| 2331 | to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell |
| 2332 | itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. |
| 2333 | |
| 2334 | ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can |
| 2335 | be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. |
| 2336 | |
| 2337 | ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. |
| 2338 | :included is an alias for :visible. |
| 2339 | |
| 2340 | easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by |
| 2341 | easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used |
| 2342 | to move or copy menu entries. |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 | ** Multibyte editing changes |
| 2345 | |
| 2346 | *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is |
| 2347 | an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to |
| 2348 | make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also |
| 2349 | work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and |
| 2350 | char-bytes in a loop typically as below: |
| 2351 | (setq char (sref str idx) |
| 2352 | idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) |
| 2353 | The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. |
| 2354 | |
| 2355 | If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character |
| 2356 | (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: |
| 2357 | (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) |
| 2358 | |
| 2359 | *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the |
| 2360 | region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or |
| 2361 | deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: |
| 2362 | |
| 2363 | Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted |
| 2364 | |
| 2365 | This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character |
| 2366 | across the boundary. |
| 2367 | |
| 2368 | *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include |
| 2369 | `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: |
| 2370 | o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and |
| 2371 | contains 8-bit characters. |
| 2372 | o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and |
| 2373 | contains invalid characters. |
| 2374 | |
| 2375 | *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove |
| 2376 | text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly |
| 2377 | preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing |
| 2378 | text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct |
| 2379 | way. |
| 2380 | |
| 2381 | *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. |
| 2382 | If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of |
| 2383 | end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by |
| 2384 | prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 | *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly |
| 2387 | compose Thai characters in a string. |
| 2388 | |
| 2389 | ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third |
| 2390 | argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name |
| 2391 | for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as |
| 2392 | menus should always use the third argument. |
| 2393 | |
| 2394 | ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, |
| 2395 | read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second |
| 2396 | arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current |
| 2397 | input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. |
| 2398 | |
| 2399 | ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents |
| 2400 | of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in |
| 2401 | programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing |
| 2402 | inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. |
| 2403 | |
| 2404 | ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in |
| 2405 | the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it |
| 2406 | returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous |
| 2407 | echo area contents. |
| 2408 | |
| 2409 | (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) |
| 2410 | |
| 2411 | ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument |
| 2412 | NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the |
| 2413 | requested feature cannot be loaded. |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 | ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the |
| 2416 | foreground color, background color or stipple pattern |
| 2417 | means to clear out that attribute. |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 | ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame |
| 2420 | gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. |
| 2421 | |
| 2422 | ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now |
| 2423 | read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode |
| 2424 | unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the |
| 2425 | end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. |
| 2426 | |
| 2427 | ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on |
| 2428 | the gap of the current buffer. |
| 2429 | |
| 2430 | ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way |
| 2431 | to convert between character positions and byte positions in the |
| 2432 | current buffer. |
| 2433 | |
| 2434 | ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to |
| 2435 | facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. |
| 2436 | These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check |
| 2437 | it back in after any modifications have been made. |
| 2438 | \f |
| 2439 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
| 2440 | |
| 2441 | ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of |
| 2442 | the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and |
| 2443 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those |
| 2444 | directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and |
| 2445 | subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. |
| 2446 | |
| 2447 | Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose |
| 2448 | names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. |
| 2449 | Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory |
| 2450 | which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use |
| 2451 | these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. |
| 2452 | |
| 2453 | Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it |
| 2454 | starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each |
| 2455 | time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. |
| 2456 | |
| 2457 | This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs |
| 2458 | Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically |
| 2459 | to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the |
| 2460 | subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a |
| 2461 | `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired |
| 2462 | results. |
| 2463 | |
| 2464 | ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from |
| 2465 | GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers |
| 2466 | that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in |
| 2467 | fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. |
| 2468 | \f |
| 2469 | * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
| 2470 | |
| 2471 | ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command |
| 2472 | including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, |
| 2473 | it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can |
| 2474 | perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. |
| 2475 | |
| 2476 | ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a |
| 2477 | specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired |
| 2478 | region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing |
| 2479 | further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo |
| 2480 | command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made |
| 2481 | within the region you originally specified, until either all of them |
| 2482 | are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that |
| 2483 | region. |
| 2484 | |
| 2485 | In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests |
| 2486 | selective undo. |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 | ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are |
| 2489 | unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte |
| 2490 | buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same |
| 2491 | effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs |
| 2492 | Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. |
| 2493 | |
| 2494 | The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, |
| 2495 | though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use |
| 2496 | -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to |
| 2497 | load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. |
| 2498 | |
| 2499 | ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and |
| 2500 | no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the |
| 2501 | enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is |
| 2502 | something that most users not do. |
| 2503 | |
| 2504 | ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste |
| 2505 | operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. |
| 2506 | The coding system can make a difference for communication with other |
| 2507 | applications. |
| 2508 | |
| 2509 | C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and |
| 2510 | pasting operations. |
| 2511 | |
| 2512 | ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by |
| 2513 | setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks |
| 2514 | like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different |
| 2515 | printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting |
| 2516 | `ps-printer-name'. |
| 2517 | |
| 2518 | ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a |
| 2519 | minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember |
| 2520 | any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it |
| 2521 | except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting |
| 2522 | incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor |
| 2523 | hits a new word. |
| 2524 | |
| 2525 | Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for |
| 2526 | Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not |
| 2527 | to be confused by TeX commands. |
| 2528 | |
| 2529 | You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something |
| 2530 | correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by |
| 2531 | clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu |
| 2532 | of various alternative replacements and actions. |
| 2533 | |
| 2534 | Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces |
| 2535 | the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several |
| 2536 | corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in |
| 2537 | alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if |
| 2538 | flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. |
| 2539 | |
| 2540 | Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if |
| 2541 | flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. |
| 2542 | |
| 2543 | ** Changes in input method usage. |
| 2544 | |
| 2545 | Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among |
| 2546 | the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p |
| 2547 | respectively. |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 | You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. |
| 2550 | |
| 2551 | If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one |
| 2552 | of the alternatives with Mouse-2. |
| 2553 | |
| 2554 | The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so |
| 2555 | that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. |
| 2556 | |
| 2557 | If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. |
| 2558 | |
| 2559 | If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. |
| 2560 | |
| 2561 | If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only |
| 2562 | when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. |
| 2563 | |
| 2564 | If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is |
| 2565 | given in the following case: |
| 2566 | o When you are using a complex input method. |
| 2567 | o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. |
| 2568 | |
| 2569 | If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting |
| 2570 | input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, |
| 2571 | and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, |
| 2572 | setting it to t is helpful. |
| 2573 | |
| 2574 | The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. |
| 2575 | |
| 2576 | In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following |
| 2577 | keys: |
| 2578 | Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method |
| 2579 | C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc |
| 2580 | F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja |
| 2581 | These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language |
| 2582 | environment. |
| 2583 | |
| 2584 | ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file |
| 2585 | names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the |
| 2586 | minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to |
| 2587 | get |
| 2588 | |
| 2589 | /usr/foo//etc/passwd |
| 2590 | |
| 2591 | which stands for the file /etc/passwd. |
| 2592 | |
| 2593 | Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. |
| 2594 | Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. |
| 2595 | |
| 2596 | ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t |
| 2597 | at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve |
| 2598 | its owner and group. |
| 2599 | |
| 2600 | ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs |
| 2601 | Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. |
| 2602 | |
| 2603 | ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle |
| 2604 | contents before inserting the specified string on each line. |
| 2605 | |
| 2606 | ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle |
| 2607 | which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column |
| 2608 | in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified |
| 2609 | by the left edge of the rectangle. |
| 2610 | |
| 2611 | ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, |
| 2612 | increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit |
| 2613 | C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful |
| 2614 | for writing keyboard macros. |
| 2615 | |
| 2616 | ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, |
| 2617 | files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The |
| 2618 | frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as |
| 2619 | the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define |
| 2620 | additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and |
| 2621 | info. |
| 2622 | |
| 2623 | ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. |
| 2624 | |
| 2625 | ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x |
| 2626 | query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region |
| 2627 | contents only. |
| 2628 | |
| 2629 | ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for |
| 2630 | confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call |
| 2631 | the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM |
| 2632 | says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. |
| 2633 | |
| 2634 | ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited |
| 2635 | non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file |
| 2636 | literally. If you say no, it signals an error. |
| 2637 | |
| 2638 | ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature |
| 2639 | now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. |
| 2640 | Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is |
| 2641 | inconsistent with Emacs conventions. |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 | ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or |
| 2644 | failure if the command produces no output. |
| 2645 | |
| 2646 | ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window |
| 2647 | manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move |
| 2648 | the mouse. |
| 2649 | |
| 2650 | ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to |
| 2651 | mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related |
| 2652 | function and variable names. |
| 2653 | |
| 2654 | ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for |
| 2655 | reading specific files. This has higher priority than |
| 2656 | file-coding-system-alist. |
| 2657 | |
| 2658 | ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to |
| 2659 | t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by |
| 2660 | converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to |
| 2661 | the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed |
| 2662 | according to the current fontset. |
| 2663 | |
| 2664 | ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. |
| 2665 | |
| 2666 | The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of |
| 2667 | that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and |
| 2668 | nonascii-insert-offset. |
| 2669 | |
| 2670 | For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if |
| 2671 | enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table |
| 2672 | nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte |
| 2673 | characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. |
| 2674 | |
| 2675 | ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get |
| 2676 | an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. |
| 2677 | |
| 2678 | ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case |
| 2679 | letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. |
| 2680 | |
| 2681 | ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables |
| 2682 | are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant |
| 2683 | command keys. |
| 2684 | |
| 2685 | ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for |
| 2686 | user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. |
| 2687 | |
| 2688 | Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for |
| 2689 | user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at |
| 2690 | all variables that have documentation. |
| 2691 | |
| 2692 | ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer |
| 2693 | shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way |
| 2694 | that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable |
| 2695 | minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap |
| 2696 | it should show; the default is 20. |
| 2697 | |
| 2698 | Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, |
| 2699 | the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole |
| 2700 | of your input. |
| 2701 | |
| 2702 | ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize |
| 2703 | all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in |
| 2704 | recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as |
| 2705 | argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all |
| 2706 | the customizable options which were changed since that version. |
| 2707 | Newly added options are included as well. |
| 2708 | |
| 2709 | If you don't specify a particular version number argument, |
| 2710 | then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options |
| 2711 | for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. |
| 2712 | |
| 2713 | This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the |
| 2714 | Customize menu. |
| 2715 | |
| 2716 | ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out |
| 2717 | the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. |
| 2718 | |
| 2719 | ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of |
| 2720 | buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were |
| 2721 | invoked. |
| 2722 | |
| 2723 | ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces |
| 2724 | that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. |
| 2725 | The default is 1. |
| 2726 | |
| 2727 | ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol |
| 2728 | syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has |
| 2729 | new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram |
| 2730 | (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block |
| 2731 | sensibly. |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 | ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. |
| 2734 | |
| 2735 | ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil |
| 2736 | value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make |
| 2737 | two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. |
| 2738 | |
| 2739 | ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a |
| 2740 | reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string |
| 2741 | for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically |
| 2742 | every night. |
| 2743 | |
| 2744 | ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set |
| 2745 | the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 | ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to |
| 2748 | read and post multi-lingual articles. |
| 2749 | |
| 2750 | ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when |
| 2751 | doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should |
| 2752 | be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden |
| 2753 | outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and |
| 2754 | the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is |
| 2755 | made invisible again. |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 | ** Mail reading and sending changes |
| 2758 | |
| 2759 | *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of |
| 2760 | the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any |
| 2761 | changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently |
| 2762 | toggle. |
| 2763 | |
| 2764 | *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, |
| 2765 | now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the |
| 2766 | summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if |
| 2767 | the message has no subject, is stored in the variable |
| 2768 | rmail-default-body-file. |
| 2769 | |
| 2770 | *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no |
| 2771 | longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they |
| 2772 | handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. |
| 2773 | |
| 2774 | *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, |
| 2775 | it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression |
| 2776 | is evaluated to insert the signature. |
| 2777 | |
| 2778 | *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of |
| 2779 | outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email |
| 2780 | handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for |
| 2781 | putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for |
| 2782 | transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be |
| 2783 | especially interested in trying feedmail. |
| 2784 | |
| 2785 | feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of |
| 2786 | feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features |
| 2787 | provided by feedmail are: |
| 2788 | |
| 2789 | **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and |
| 2790 | stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); |
| 2791 | there is also a queue for draft messages |
| 2792 | |
| 2793 | **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and |
| 2794 | be prompted for confirmation |
| 2795 | |
| 2796 | **** does smart filling of address headers |
| 2797 | |
| 2798 | **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be |
| 2799 | the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this |
| 2800 | can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get |
| 2801 | |
| 2802 | **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting |
| 2803 | the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, |
| 2804 | /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new |
| 2805 | function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) |
| 2806 | |
| 2807 | ** Dired changes |
| 2808 | |
| 2809 | *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked |
| 2810 | files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". |
| 2811 | |
| 2812 | *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily |
| 2813 | run Dired on the directory name at point. |
| 2814 | |
| 2815 | *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of |
| 2816 | files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match |
| 2817 | for a specified regexp. |
| 2818 | |
| 2819 | ** VC Changes |
| 2820 | |
| 2821 | *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control |
| 2822 | conveniently. |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 | *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much |
| 2825 | faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary |
| 2826 | Dired. |
| 2827 | |
| 2828 | VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the |
| 2829 | directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive |
| 2830 | listing of all files at or below the given directory which are |
| 2831 | currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). |
| 2832 | |
| 2833 | You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, |
| 2834 | then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set |
| 2835 | vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version |
| 2836 | control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' |
| 2837 | on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. |
| 2838 | |
| 2839 | All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which |
| 2840 | is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type |
| 2841 | `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on |
| 2842 | the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes |
| 2843 | `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. |
| 2844 | |
| 2845 | The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to |
| 2846 | toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all |
| 2847 | VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
| 2848 | `* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
| 2849 | |
| 2850 | Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in |
| 2851 | ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls |
| 2852 | command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. |
| 2853 | |
| 2854 | *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working |
| 2855 | file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff |
| 2856 | session to resolve them. |
| 2857 | |
| 2858 | Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to |
| 2859 | resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that |
| 2860 | contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS |
| 2861 | uses as well). |
| 2862 | |
| 2863 | *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new |
| 2864 | command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When |
| 2865 | you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify |
| 2866 | either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that |
| 2867 | branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. |
| 2868 | If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, |
| 2869 | using ediff. |
| 2870 | |
| 2871 | ** Changes in Font Lock |
| 2872 | |
| 2873 | *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face |
| 2874 | are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical |
| 2875 | use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are |
| 2876 | unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for |
| 2877 | compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. |
| 2878 | |
| 2879 | ** Frame name display changes |
| 2880 | |
| 2881 | *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current |
| 2882 | frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and |
| 2883 | raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or |
| 2884 | when many frames are invisible or iconified. |
| 2885 | |
| 2886 | *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the |
| 2887 | frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames |
| 2888 | menu. |
| 2889 | |
| 2890 | ** Comint (subshell) changes |
| 2891 | |
| 2892 | *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a |
| 2893 | subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility |
| 2894 | with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. |
| 2895 | |
| 2896 | *** There are new commands in Comint mode. |
| 2897 | |
| 2898 | C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; |
| 2899 | that is, the line after the last line you got. |
| 2900 | You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. |
| 2901 | |
| 2902 | C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to |
| 2903 | send the current line together with the following line, when you send |
| 2904 | the following line. |
| 2905 | |
| 2906 | C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, |
| 2907 | which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the |
| 2908 | previously sent input. |
| 2909 | |
| 2910 | C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; |
| 2911 | it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input |
| 2912 | as the search string. |
| 2913 | |
| 2914 | *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll |
| 2915 | automatically in compilation-mode windows. |
| 2916 | |
| 2917 | ** C mode changes |
| 2918 | |
| 2919 | *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, |
| 2920 | and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is |
| 2921 | assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro |
| 2922 | definition. |
| 2923 | |
| 2924 | *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified |
| 2925 | (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. |
| 2926 | Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" |
| 2927 | style is still the default however. |
| 2928 | |
| 2929 | *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. |
| 2930 | |
| 2931 | *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which |
| 2932 | are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer |
| 2933 | them. They do not have key bindings by default. |
| 2934 | |
| 2935 | *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) |
| 2936 | and M-e (c-end-of-statement). |
| 2937 | |
| 2938 | *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols |
| 2939 | namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. |
| 2940 | |
| 2941 | *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets |
| 2942 | makes the style variables local to that buffer only. |
| 2943 | |
| 2944 | *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, |
| 2945 | c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. |
| 2946 | |
| 2947 | *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You |
| 2948 | should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire |
| 2949 | package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new |
| 2950 | variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. |
| 2951 | |
| 2952 | ** Changes to hippie-expand. |
| 2953 | |
| 2954 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
| 2955 | non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
| 2956 | which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. |
| 2957 | |
| 2958 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If |
| 2959 | non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when |
| 2960 | expanding dynamically. |
| 2961 | |
| 2962 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If |
| 2963 | non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. |
| 2964 | |
| 2965 | *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If |
| 2966 | non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in |
| 2967 | this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose |
| 2968 | expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. |
| 2969 | |
| 2970 | *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. |
| 2971 | |
| 2972 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
| 2973 | |
| 2974 | *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable |
| 2975 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during |
| 2976 | automatic key generation. This replaces variable |
| 2977 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches |
| 2978 | against the first word in the title. |
| 2979 | |
| 2980 | *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just |
| 2981 | capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, |
| 2982 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with |
| 2983 | lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
| 2984 | lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
| 2985 | bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
| 2986 | |
| 2987 | *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key |
| 2988 | generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is |
| 2989 | replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and |
| 2990 | bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. |
| 2991 | |
| 2992 | ** Changes in vcursor.el. |
| 2993 | |
| 2994 | *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap |
| 2995 | and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A |
| 2996 | variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be |
| 2997 | entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including |
| 2998 | `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency |
| 2999 | in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. |
| 3000 | |
| 3001 | *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the |
| 3002 | Editing group once the package is loaded. |
| 3003 | |
| 3004 | *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is |
| 3005 | generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set |
| 3006 | vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour. |
| 3007 | |
| 3008 | *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the |
| 3009 | vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. |
| 3010 | |
| 3011 | ** Ispell changes. |
| 3012 | |
| 3013 | *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
| 3014 | buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings |
| 3015 | are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
| 3016 | |
| 3017 | *** Generic region skipping implemented. |
| 3018 | A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will |
| 3019 | and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user |
| 3020 | defined. New applications and improvements made available by this |
| 3021 | include: |
| 3022 | |
| 3023 | o URLs are automatically skipped |
| 3024 | o EMail message checking is vastly improved. |
| 3025 | |
| 3026 | *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. |
| 3027 | |
| 3028 | ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
| 3029 | |
| 3030 | RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very |
| 3031 | large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been |
| 3032 | re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the |
| 3033 | section `Optimizations' in the manual. |
| 3034 | |
| 3035 | *** New recursive parser. |
| 3036 | |
| 3037 | The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the |
| 3038 | entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new |
| 3039 | recursive parser scans the individual files. |
| 3040 | |
| 3041 | *** Parsing only part of a document. |
| 3042 | |
| 3043 | Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
| 3044 | partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of |
| 3045 | the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. |
| 3046 | |
| 3047 | (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) |
| 3048 | |
| 3049 | *** Storing parsing information in a file. |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 | This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use |
| 3052 | |
| 3053 | (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) |
| 3054 | |
| 3055 | *** Using multiple selection buffers |
| 3056 | |
| 3057 | If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens |
| 3058 | for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting |
| 3059 | |
| 3060 | (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) |
| 3061 | |
| 3062 | *** References to external documents. |
| 3063 | |
| 3064 | The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external |
| 3065 | documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external |
| 3066 | documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument |
| 3067 | macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with |
| 3068 | RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in |
| 3069 | the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). |
| 3070 | The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. |
| 3071 | |
| 3072 | *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. |
| 3073 | |
| 3074 | The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
| 3075 | and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
| 3076 | |
| 3077 | Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes |
| 3078 | the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. |
| 3079 | |
| 3080 | *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers |
| 3081 | |
| 3082 | The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* |
| 3083 | buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. |
| 3084 | |
| 3085 | *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. |
| 3086 | |
| 3087 | The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of |
| 3088 | contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', |
| 3089 | `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes |
| 3090 | have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you |
| 3091 | enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' |
| 3092 | at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out |
| 3093 | more. |
| 3094 | |
| 3095 | *** Support for the varioref package |
| 3096 | |
| 3097 | The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. |
| 3098 | |
| 3099 | *** New hooks |
| 3100 | |
| 3101 | Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, |
| 3102 | and citations are created. These hooks are |
| 3103 | `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', |
| 3104 | `reftex-format-cite-function'. |
| 3105 | |
| 3106 | *** Citations outside LaTeX |
| 3107 | |
| 3108 | The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in |
| 3109 | a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. |
| 3110 | |
| 3111 | *** Short context is no longer fontified. |
| 3112 | |
| 3113 | The short context in the label menu no longer copies the |
| 3114 | fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be |
| 3115 | fontified, use |
| 3116 | |
| 3117 | (setq reftex-refontify-context t) |
| 3118 | |
| 3119 | ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. |
| 3120 | With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of |
| 3121 | the file name within its directory; it only checks for other |
| 3122 | directories that contain the same file name. |
| 3123 | |
| 3124 | Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file |
| 3125 | Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary |
| 3126 | file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to |
| 3127 | Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that |
| 3128 | have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer |
| 3129 | names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other |
| 3130 | directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present |
| 3131 | directory. |
| 3132 | |
| 3133 | ** New modes and packages |
| 3134 | |
| 3135 | *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. |
| 3136 | It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer |
| 3137 | it, but some do not. |
| 3138 | |
| 3139 | *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL |
| 3140 | code. |
| 3141 | |
| 3142 | *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the |
| 3143 | current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move |
| 3144 | around in a buffer. |
| 3145 | |
| 3146 | Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. |
| 3147 | |
| 3148 | *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author |
| 3149 | uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should |
| 3150 | be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an |
| 3151 | established system of notation similar to Chess. |
| 3152 | |
| 3153 | *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp |
| 3154 | documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style |
| 3155 | guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. |
| 3156 | |
| 3157 | *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features |
| 3158 | available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around |
| 3159 | system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of |
| 3160 | simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also |
| 3161 | functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and |
| 3162 | the like. |
| 3163 | |
| 3164 | *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to |
| 3165 | identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. |
| 3166 | |
| 3167 | *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done |
| 3168 | within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not |
| 3169 | used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize |
| 3170 | the user option `midnight-mode' to t. |
| 3171 | |
| 3172 | *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. |
| 3173 | |
| 3174 | apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files |
| 3175 | samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files |
| 3176 | fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files |
| 3177 | x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files |
| 3178 | hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) |
| 3179 | mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files |
| 3180 | javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files |
| 3181 | vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files |
| 3182 | java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files |
| 3183 | java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files |
| 3184 | mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files |
| 3185 | |
| 3186 | Platform-specific modes: |
| 3187 | |
| 3188 | prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files |
| 3189 | pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files |
| 3190 | alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files |
| 3191 | inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files |
| 3192 | ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files |
| 3193 | reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files |
| 3194 | bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts |
| 3195 | rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files |
| 3196 | rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts |
| 3197 | \f |
| 3198 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
| 3199 | |
| 3200 | ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, |
| 3201 | use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. |
| 3202 | That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. |
| 3203 | Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. |
| 3204 | |
| 3205 | Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether |
| 3206 | you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives |
| 3207 | consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. |
| 3208 | |
| 3209 | ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, |
| 3210 | and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can |
| 3211 | specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for |
| 3212 | searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. |
| 3213 | |
| 3214 | ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and |
| 3215 | multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte |
| 3216 | character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language |
| 3217 | environment. |
| 3218 | |
| 3219 | ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now |
| 3220 | take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt |
| 3221 | string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the |
| 3222 | current input method for reading this one event. |
| 3223 | |
| 3224 | ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte |
| 3225 | now control whether to output certain characters as |
| 3226 | backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte |
| 3227 | non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte |
| 3228 | characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing |
| 3229 | in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). |
| 3230 | \f |
| 3231 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
| 3232 | |
| 3233 | ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version |
| 3234 | of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. |
| 3235 | |
| 3236 | ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were |
| 3237 | in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) |
| 3238 | always increases point by 1. |
| 3239 | |
| 3240 | The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is |
| 3241 | considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. |
| 3242 | |
| 3243 | See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. |
| 3244 | |
| 3245 | ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. |
| 3246 | Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's |
| 3247 | default value changed. For example, |
| 3248 | |
| 3249 | (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." |
| 3250 | :type 'integer |
| 3251 | :group 'foo |
| 3252 | :version "20.3") |
| 3253 | |
| 3254 | (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
| 3255 | :version "20.3") |
| 3256 | |
| 3257 | If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the |
| 3258 | default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It |
| 3259 | is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a |
| 3260 | `:version' in the top level group. |
| 3261 | |
| 3262 | This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. |
| 3263 | |
| 3264 | ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name |
| 3265 | starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. |
| 3266 | |
| 3267 | However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that |
| 3268 | symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that |
| 3269 | support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables |
| 3270 | to themselves. |
| 3271 | |
| 3272 | If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, |
| 3273 | this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any |
| 3274 | values whatever. |
| 3275 | |
| 3276 | ** There is a new debugger command, R. |
| 3277 | It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result |
| 3278 | in the buffer *Debugger-record*. |
| 3279 | |
| 3280 | ** Frame-local variables. |
| 3281 | |
| 3282 | You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call |
| 3283 | the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have |
| 3284 | local bindings for that variable. |
| 3285 | |
| 3286 | These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a |
| 3287 | frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling |
| 3288 | modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the |
| 3289 | parameter name. |
| 3290 | |
| 3291 | Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. |
| 3292 | Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is |
| 3293 | active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, |
| 3294 | that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. |
| 3295 | |
| 3296 | It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not |
| 3297 | clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a |
| 3298 | very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect |
| 3299 | through a window-local binding would not be very robust. |
| 3300 | |
| 3301 | ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing |
| 3302 | "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when |
| 3303 | evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form |
| 3304 | makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. |
| 3305 | See the documentation in sregex.el. |
| 3306 | |
| 3307 | ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which |
| 3308 | is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to |
| 3309 | parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. |
| 3310 | The contents of this field are not yet finalized. |
| 3311 | |
| 3312 | ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. |
| 3313 | If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. |
| 3314 | |
| 3315 | ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from |
| 3316 | known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can |
| 3317 | define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. |
| 3318 | |
| 3319 | ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE |
| 3320 | when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as |
| 3321 | it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the |
| 3322 | history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. |
| 3323 | |
| 3324 | The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to |
| 3325 | return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters |
| 3326 | empty input. |
| 3327 | |
| 3328 | ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use |
| 3329 | for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to |
| 3330 | `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. |
| 3331 | Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as |
| 3332 | `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. |
| 3333 | |
| 3334 | ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, |
| 3335 | echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: |
| 3336 | a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a |
| 3337 | default password to use if the user enters nothing. |
| 3338 | |
| 3339 | ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to |
| 3340 | specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a |
| 3341 | function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the |
| 3342 | place where a break is being considered. If the function returns |
| 3343 | non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. |
| 3344 | |
| 3345 | ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. |
| 3346 | If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate |
| 3347 | up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the |
| 3348 | end of the window, even if this requires computation. |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 | ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME |
| 3351 | which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. |
| 3352 | If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. |
| 3353 | |
| 3354 | ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, |
| 3355 | holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window |
| 3356 | was directed to display this buffer. |
| 3357 | |
| 3358 | ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects |
| 3359 | with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they |
| 3360 | describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in |
| 3361 | other words, if they would give the same results if passed to |
| 3362 | set-window-configuration. |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 | ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two |
| 3365 | window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer |
| 3366 | positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of |
| 3367 | windows and the choice of buffers to display. |
| 3368 | |
| 3369 | ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to |
| 3370 | override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist |
| 3371 | look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). |
| 3372 | |
| 3373 | If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a |
| 3374 | non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the |
| 3375 | map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. |
| 3376 | |
| 3377 | minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, |
| 3378 | and it is meant to be set by major modes. |
| 3379 | |
| 3380 | ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string |
| 3381 | except that it discards all text properties from the result. |
| 3382 | |
| 3383 | ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument |
| 3384 | USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as |
| 3385 | floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 | ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory |
| 3388 | to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined |
| 3389 | in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems |
| 3390 | it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. |
| 3391 | |
| 3392 | ** Menu changes |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 | *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the |
| 3395 | keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now |
| 3396 | better supported. |
| 3397 | |
| 3398 | The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls |
| 3399 | a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when |
| 3400 | you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you |
| 3401 | can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; |
| 3402 | then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. |
| 3403 | |
| 3404 | *** A new format for menu items is supported. |
| 3405 | |
| 3406 | In a keymap, a key binding that has the format |
| 3407 | (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) |
| 3408 | defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that |
| 3409 | starts with the symbol `menu-item'. |
| 3410 | |
| 3411 | The format is: |
| 3412 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or |
| 3413 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) |
| 3414 | where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item |
| 3415 | string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. |
| 3416 | The supported properties include |
| 3417 | |
| 3418 | :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
| 3419 | item is enabled. |
| 3420 | :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
| 3421 | item should appear in the menu. |
| 3422 | :filter FILTER-FN |
| 3423 | FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
| 3424 | which will be REAL-BINDING. |
| 3425 | It should return a binding to use instead. |
| 3426 | :keys DESCRIPTION |
| 3427 | DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard |
| 3428 | binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
| 3429 | `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
| 3430 | :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE |
| 3431 | KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent |
| 3432 | keyboard binding. |
| 3433 | :key-sequence nil |
| 3434 | This means that the command normally has no |
| 3435 | keyboard equivalent. |
| 3436 | :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). |
| 3437 | :button (TYPE . SELECTED) |
| 3438 | TYPE is :toggle or :radio. |
| 3439 | SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its |
| 3440 | value says whether this button is currently selected. |
| 3441 | |
| 3442 | Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. |
| 3443 | Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. |
| 3444 | |
| 3445 | (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. |
| 3446 | |
| 3447 | ** New event types |
| 3448 | |
| 3449 | *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a |
| 3450 | mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that |
| 3451 | corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, |
| 3452 | which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: |
| 3453 | |
| 3454 | (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) |
| 3455 | |
| 3456 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
| 3457 | same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number |
| 3458 | indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A |
| 3459 | negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards |
| 3460 | the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated |
| 3461 | forward, away from the user. |
| 3462 | |
| 3463 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
| 3464 | |
| 3465 | *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of |
| 3466 | files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged |
| 3467 | and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of |
| 3468 | filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically |
| 3469 | loaded into Emacs. The format is: |
| 3470 | |
| 3471 | (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) |
| 3472 | |
| 3473 | where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
| 3474 | same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames |
| 3475 | that were dragged and dropped. |
| 3476 | |
| 3477 | As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
| 3478 | |
| 3479 | ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. |
| 3480 | |
| 3481 | *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; |
| 3482 | any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way |
| 3483 | to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. |
| 3484 | |
| 3485 | *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You |
| 3486 | can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character |
| 3487 | that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. |
| 3488 | |
| 3489 | *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were |
| 3490 | in Emacs 19 and before. |
| 3491 | |
| 3492 | The function chars-in-string has been deleted. |
| 3493 | The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 | *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current |
| 3496 | buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or |
| 3497 | unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte |
| 3498 | representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. |
| 3499 | |
| 3500 | This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed |
| 3501 | as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents |
| 3502 | viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as |
| 3503 | one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation |
| 3504 | will count as two characters using unibyte representation. |
| 3505 | |
| 3506 | This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which |
| 3507 | representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer |
| 3508 | (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are |
| 3509 | consistent with the new representation. |
| 3510 | |
| 3511 | *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte |
| 3512 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care |
| 3513 | about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; |
| 3514 | however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
| 3515 | |
| 3516 | The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of |
| 3517 | nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them |
| 3518 | using the table nonascii-translation-table. |
| 3519 | |
| 3520 | *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte |
| 3521 | representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the |
| 3522 | representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
| 3523 | |
| 3524 | The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation |
| 3525 | loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically |
| 3526 | is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. |
| 3527 | |
| 3528 | *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
| 3529 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. |
| 3530 | |
| 3531 | *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
| 3532 | which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 | *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare |
| 3535 | portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, |
| 3536 | so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. |
| 3537 | You can specify whether to ignore case or not. |
| 3538 | |
| 3539 | *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that |
| 3540 | it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. |
| 3541 | |
| 3542 | *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now |
| 3543 | convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the |
| 3544 | buffer or string being searched. |
| 3545 | |
| 3546 | One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of |
| 3547 | [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when |
| 3548 | searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when |
| 3549 | searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no |
| 3550 | obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what |
| 3551 | you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular |
| 3552 | expression [^\0-\177] works for it. |
| 3553 | |
| 3554 | *** Structure of coding system changed. |
| 3555 | |
| 3556 | All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named |
| 3557 | by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector |
| 3558 | which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector |
| 3559 | as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this |
| 3560 | vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define |
| 3561 | your own alias name of a coding system by the function |
| 3562 | define-coding-system-alias. |
| 3563 | |
| 3564 | The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use |
| 3565 | the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to |
| 3566 | access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, |
| 3567 | pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, |
| 3568 | character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and |
| 3569 | safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 |
| 3570 | 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter |
| 3571 | `iso-8859-1'. |
| 3572 | |
| 3573 | Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. |
| 3574 | The value of this property is a list of character sets which this |
| 3575 | coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: |
| 3576 | (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) |
| 3577 | |
| 3578 | Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can |
| 3579 | also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they |
| 3580 | are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode |
| 3581 | the other character sets and read it back correctly. |
| 3582 | |
| 3583 | *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a |
| 3584 | proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. |
| 3585 | This function requires a user interaction. |
| 3586 | |
| 3587 | *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and |
| 3588 | find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by |
| 3589 | select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding |
| 3590 | systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want |
| 3591 | a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of |
| 3592 | select-safe-coding-system. |
| 3593 | |
| 3594 | *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as |
| 3595 | decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set |
| 3596 | last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding |
| 3597 | was done. |
| 3598 | |
| 3599 | *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be |
| 3600 | used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of |
| 3601 | coding systems used by some specific language environment. |
| 3602 | |
| 3603 | *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always |
| 3604 | return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII |
| 3605 | characters are found, they now return a list of single element |
| 3606 | `undecided' or its subsidiaries. |
| 3607 | |
| 3608 | *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and |
| 3609 | coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different |
| 3610 | coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is |
| 3611 | converted. |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 | *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a |
| 3614 | coding system for communicating with other X clients. |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 | *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid |
| 3617 | character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire |
| 3618 | character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, |
| 3619 | each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value |
| 3620 | either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a |
| 3621 | range of characters. |
| 3622 | |
| 3623 | *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a |
| 3624 | Lisp object is a valid character code or not. |
| 3625 | |
| 3626 | *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character |
| 3627 | in the current buffer at position POS. |
| 3628 | |
| 3629 | *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable |
| 3630 | input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a |
| 3631 | function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing |
| 3632 | character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the |
| 3633 | event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first |
| 3634 | binding input-method-function to nil. |
| 3635 | |
| 3636 | The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input |
| 3637 | method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as |
| 3638 | input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by |
| 3639 | the input method function are not passed to the input method function, |
| 3640 | not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. |
| 3641 | |
| 3642 | The input method function is not called when reading the second and |
| 3643 | subsequent events of a key sequence. |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 | *** You can customize any language environment by using |
| 3646 | set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. |
| 3647 | |
| 3648 | The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo |
| 3649 | customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For |
| 3650 | instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language |
| 3651 | environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up |
| 3652 | exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. |
| 3653 | \f |
| 3654 | * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
| 3655 | |
| 3656 | ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user |
| 3657 | options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look |
| 3658 | at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a |
| 3659 | tree structure. |
| 3660 | |
| 3661 | M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each |
| 3662 | user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. |
| 3663 | |
| 3664 | With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs |
| 3665 | session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically |
| 3666 | in your .emacs file.) |
| 3667 | |
| 3668 | ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. |
| 3669 | You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. |
| 3670 | |
| 3671 | ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. |
| 3672 | This makes more space in the mode line for other information. |
| 3673 | |
| 3674 | ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted |
| 3675 | immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it |
| 3676 | kills the region. |
| 3677 | |
| 3678 | The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they |
| 3679 | delete the character before point, as usual. |
| 3680 | |
| 3681 | ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted |
| 3682 | on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature |
| 3683 | by setting search-highlight to nil.) |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 | ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to |
| 3686 | insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, |
| 3687 | the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked |
| 3688 | onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the |
| 3689 | history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the |
| 3690 | past.) |
| 3691 | |
| 3692 | ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. |
| 3693 | This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode |
| 3694 | in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). |
| 3695 | TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this |
| 3696 | makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. |
| 3697 | |
| 3698 | As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, |
| 3699 | and is an alias for it. |
| 3700 | |
| 3701 | If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, |
| 3702 | use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. |
| 3703 | |
| 3704 | ** Scrolling changes |
| 3705 | |
| 3706 | *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen |
| 3707 | position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. |
| 3708 | |
| 3709 | In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing |
| 3710 | on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line |
| 3711 | where it started. |
| 3712 | |
| 3713 | *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you |
| 3714 | move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the |
| 3715 | screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that |
| 3716 | does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. |
| 3717 | |
| 3718 | *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the |
| 3719 | top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point |
| 3720 | comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs |
| 3721 | recenters the window. |
| 3722 | |
| 3723 | ** International character set support (MULE) |
| 3724 | |
| 3725 | Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, |
| 3726 | including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, |
| 3727 | Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, |
| 3728 | Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These |
| 3729 | features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as |
| 3730 | MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") |
| 3731 | |
| 3732 | Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard |
| 3733 | coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte |
| 3734 | character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide |
| 3735 | variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back |
| 3736 | into any of these coding systems when saving a file. |
| 3737 | |
| 3738 | Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, |
| 3739 | generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs |
| 3740 | supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or |
| 3741 | language, to make it possible to type them. |
| 3742 | |
| 3743 | The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII |
| 3744 | character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. |
| 3745 | |
| 3746 | The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain |
| 3747 | to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. |
| 3748 | |
| 3749 | You can disable multibyte character support as follows: |
| 3750 | |
| 3751 | (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) |
| 3752 | |
| 3753 | Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte |
| 3754 | characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second |
| 3755 | argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are |
| 3756 | already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte |
| 3757 | characters for their work until they want to change. |
| 3758 | |
| 3759 | *** Input methods |
| 3760 | |
| 3761 | An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed |
| 3762 | specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language |
| 3763 | has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use |
| 3764 | the same characters can share one input method). Some languages |
| 3765 | support several input methods. |
| 3766 | |
| 3767 | The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into |
| 3768 | another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods |
| 3769 | work. |
| 3770 | |
| 3771 | A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of |
| 3772 | characters into one letter. Many European input methods use |
| 3773 | composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which |
| 3774 | consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one |
| 3775 | sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single |
| 3776 | letter. |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 | The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed |
| 3779 | by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. |
| 3780 | First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone |
| 3781 | marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are |
| 3782 | mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". |
| 3783 | |
| 3784 | None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so |
| 3785 | they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using |
| 3786 | phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs |
| 3787 | converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. |
| 3788 | |
| 3789 | Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled |
| 3790 | word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; |
| 3791 | typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if |
| 3792 | the first guess is wrong. |
| 3793 | |
| 3794 | *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) |
| 3795 | turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. |
| 3796 | |
| 3797 | If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each |
| 3798 | byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as |
| 3799 | they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for |
| 3800 | the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. |
| 3801 | |
| 3802 | However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to |
| 3803 | use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set |
| 3804 | includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can |
| 3805 | translate automatically to and from either one. |
| 3806 | |
| 3807 | *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. |
| 3808 | |
| 3809 | Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a |
| 3810 | file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte |
| 3811 | sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not |
| 3812 | what you want. |
| 3813 | |
| 3814 | If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for |
| 3815 | example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding |
| 3816 | system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off |
| 3817 | multibyte characters in that buffer. |
| 3818 | |
| 3819 | If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off |
| 3820 | character conversion as well. |
| 3821 | |
| 3822 | *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 | A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. |
| 3825 | Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports |
| 3826 | requires using many fonts. |
| 3827 | |
| 3828 | Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a |
| 3829 | collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. |
| 3830 | |
| 3831 | A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by |
| 3832 | the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you |
| 3833 | have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as |
| 3834 | you would use a font. |
| 3835 | |
| 3836 | If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it |
| 3837 | specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot |
| 3838 | display that character. It will display an empty box instead. |
| 3839 | |
| 3840 | The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters |
| 3841 | (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII |
| 3842 | characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, |
| 3843 | or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, |
| 3844 | and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. |
| 3845 | |
| 3846 | *** Defining fontsets. |
| 3847 | |
| 3848 | Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still |
| 3849 | chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset |
| 3850 | with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. |
| 3851 | |
| 3852 | Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value |
| 3853 | of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is |
| 3854 | `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the |
| 3855 | standard fontset are created automatically. |
| 3856 | |
| 3857 | If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' |
| 3858 | argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the |
| 3859 | FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name |
| 3860 | with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short |
| 3861 | name is `fontset-startup'. |
| 3862 | |
| 3863 | Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... |
| 3864 | The resource value should have this form: |
| 3865 | FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... |
| 3866 | FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: |
| 3867 | * most fields should be just the wild card "*". |
| 3868 | * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" |
| 3869 | * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. |
| 3870 | The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number |
| 3871 | of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. |
| 3872 | CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and |
| 3873 | FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set. |
| 3874 | |
| 3875 | Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the |
| 3876 | last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. |
| 3877 | You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. |
| 3878 | |
| 3879 | For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a |
| 3880 | font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the |
| 3881 | following resource, |
| 3882 | Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 |
| 3883 | the font for ASCII is generated as below: |
| 3884 | -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 |
| 3885 | Here is the substitution rule: |
| 3886 | Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset |
| 3887 | defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has |
| 3888 | the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce |
| 3889 | sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. |
| 3890 | (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) |
| 3891 | |
| 3892 | The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the |
| 3893 | fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call |
| 3894 | that function explicitly to create a fontset. |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 | With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just |
| 3897 | like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset |
| 3898 | name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the |
| 3899 | fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle |
| 3900 | fontsets. |
| 3901 | |
| 3902 | *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs |
| 3903 | defaults for a particular choice of language. |
| 3904 | |
| 3905 | Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input |
| 3906 | method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when |
| 3907 | visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have |
| 3908 | already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The |
| 3909 | language environment may also specify a default choice of coding |
| 3910 | system for new files that you create. |
| 3911 | |
| 3912 | It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use |
| 3913 | set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the |
| 3914 | whole Emacs session. |
| 3915 | |
| 3916 | For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET |
| 3917 | chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this |
| 3918 | with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 | *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) |
| 3921 | specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This |
| 3922 | specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving |
| 3923 | the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the |
| 3924 | coding systems that Emacs supports. |
| 3925 | |
| 3926 | *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) |
| 3927 | lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. |
| 3928 | This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. |
| 3929 | After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system |
| 3930 | is used for *the immediately following command*. |
| 3931 | |
| 3932 | So if the immediately following command is a command to read or |
| 3933 | write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. |
| 3934 | |
| 3935 | If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, |
| 3936 | then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. |
| 3937 | |
| 3938 | For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET |
| 3939 | visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. |
| 3940 | |
| 3941 | *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- |
| 3942 | construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- |
| 3943 | to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also |
| 3944 | specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end |
| 3945 | of the file. |
| 3946 | |
| 3947 | *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies |
| 3948 | the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character |
| 3949 | code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are |
| 3950 | translated into that character code. |
| 3951 | |
| 3952 | This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in |
| 3953 | various countries to support the languages of those countries. |
| 3954 | |
| 3955 | By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. |
| 3956 | |
| 3957 | *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies |
| 3958 | the coding system for keyboard input. |
| 3959 | |
| 3960 | Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals |
| 3961 | with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, |
| 3962 | some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. |
| 3963 | |
| 3964 | By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. |
| 3965 | |
| 3966 | Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an |
| 3967 | input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that |
| 3968 | translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed |
| 3969 | to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are |
| 3970 | designed to work with terminals. |
| 3971 | |
| 3972 | *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) |
| 3973 | specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. |
| 3974 | This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess |
| 3975 | has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify |
| 3976 | translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command |
| 3977 | in the corresponding buffer. |
| 3978 | |
| 3979 | By default, process input and output are not translated at all. |
| 3980 | |
| 3981 | *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system |
| 3982 | to use for encoding file names before operating on them. |
| 3983 | It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. |
| 3984 | |
| 3985 | *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates |
| 3986 | an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the |
| 3987 | command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you |
| 3988 | want to use. |
| 3989 | |
| 3990 | C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input |
| 3991 | method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. |
| 3992 | |
| 3993 | *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard |
| 3994 | layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this |
| 3995 | remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify |
| 3996 | which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. |
| 3997 | |
| 3998 | *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays |
| 3999 | the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus |
| 4000 | related information. |
| 4001 | |
| 4002 | *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called |
| 4003 | HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various |
| 4004 | scripts. |
| 4005 | |
| 4006 | *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays |
| 4007 | information about the support for a particular language. |
| 4008 | You specify the language as an argument. |
| 4009 | |
| 4010 | *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies |
| 4011 | the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the |
| 4012 | first dash. |
| 4013 | |
| 4014 | A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion |
| 4015 | (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion |
| 4016 | whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits |
| 4017 | 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: |
| 4018 | |
| 4019 | A alternativnyj (Russian) |
| 4020 | B big5 (Chinese) |
| 4021 | C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) |
| 4022 | C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) |
| 4023 | D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) |
| 4024 | E euc-japan (Japanese) |
| 4025 | I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
| 4026 | J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) |
| 4027 | K euc-korea (Korean) |
| 4028 | R koi8 (Russian) |
| 4029 | Q tibetan |
| 4030 | S shift_jis (Japanese) |
| 4031 | T lao |
| 4032 | T tis620 (Thai) |
| 4033 | V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) |
| 4034 | i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
| 4035 | k iso-2022-kr (Korean) |
| 4036 | v viqr (Vietnamese) |
| 4037 | z hz (Chinese) |
| 4038 | |
| 4039 | When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), |
| 4040 | two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file |
| 4041 | coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for |
| 4042 | keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. |
| 4043 | |
| 4044 | *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code |
| 4045 | conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. |
| 4046 | |
| 4047 | When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically |
| 4048 | into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with |
| 4049 | rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing |
| 4050 | Rmail files themselves. |
| 4051 | |
| 4052 | *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code |
| 4053 | conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. |
| 4054 | |
| 4055 | Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system |
| 4056 | for sending mail: |
| 4057 | |
| 4058 | - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. |
| 4059 | - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. |
| 4060 | - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, |
| 4061 | if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. |
| 4062 | - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. |
| 4063 | |
| 4064 | *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument |
| 4065 | to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, |
| 4066 | Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional |
| 4067 | translations. |
| 4068 | |
| 4069 | ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion |
| 4070 | of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command |
| 4071 | insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer |
| 4072 | without any conversion. |
| 4073 | |
| 4074 | ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. |
| 4075 | You can now specify any number of octal digits. |
| 4076 | RET terminates the digits and is discarded; |
| 4077 | any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. |
| 4078 | |
| 4079 | ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for |
| 4080 | functions, variables and file names used in your programs. |
| 4081 | |
| 4082 | Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. |
| 4083 | Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. |
| 4084 | |
| 4085 | Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major |
| 4086 | mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. |
| 4087 | |
| 4088 | ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command |
| 4089 | complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name |
| 4090 | in the buffer before point. |
| 4091 | |
| 4092 | With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of |
| 4093 | symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that |
| 4094 | you are using. |
| 4095 | |
| 4096 | With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, |
| 4097 | just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). |
| 4098 | |
| 4099 | ** File locking works with NFS now. |
| 4100 | |
| 4101 | The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, |
| 4102 | in the same directory as FILENAME. |
| 4103 | |
| 4104 | This means that collision detection between two different machines now |
| 4105 | works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory |
| 4106 | can become a bottleneck. |
| 4107 | |
| 4108 | The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection |
| 4109 | does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot |
| 4110 | create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the |
| 4111 | file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are |
| 4112 | rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is |
| 4113 | so useful that the change is worth while. |
| 4114 | |
| 4115 | When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which |
| 4116 | are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious |
| 4117 | collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just |
| 4118 | tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. |
| 4119 | |
| 4120 | ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, |
| 4121 | it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call |
| 4122 | show-paren-mode. |
| 4123 | |
| 4124 | ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted |
| 4125 | selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load |
| 4126 | delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 | ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words |
| 4129 | within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load |
| 4130 | complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. |
| 4131 | |
| 4132 | ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, |
| 4133 | it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also |
| 4134 | set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. |
| 4135 | |
| 4136 | ** Changes in View mode. |
| 4137 | |
| 4138 | *** Several new commands are available in View mode. |
| 4139 | Do H in view mode for a list of commands. |
| 4140 | |
| 4141 | *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: |
| 4142 | view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. |
| 4143 | |
| 4144 | *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their |
| 4145 | previous state. |
| 4146 | |
| 4147 | *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, |
| 4148 | scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. |
| 4149 | |
| 4150 | *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If |
| 4151 | non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, |
| 4152 | not just the selected window. |
| 4153 | |
| 4154 | *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a |
| 4155 | read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only |
| 4156 | turns View mode on or off. |
| 4157 | |
| 4158 | *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls |
| 4159 | how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, |
| 4160 | delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. |
| 4161 | |
| 4162 | ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, |
| 4163 | now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. |
| 4164 | |
| 4165 | ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, |
| 4166 | has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is |
| 4167 | presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks |
| 4168 | which version to compare with. |
| 4169 | |
| 4170 | ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden |
| 4171 | blocks if a match is inside the block. |
| 4172 | |
| 4173 | The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match |
| 4174 | is outside the block. By customizing the variable |
| 4175 | isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily |
| 4176 | shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 | By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind |
| 4179 | of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code |
| 4180 | blocks, all of them or none. |
| 4181 | |
| 4182 | ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the |
| 4183 | current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for |
| 4184 | confirmation first. |
| 4185 | |
| 4186 | ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, |
| 4187 | now changes the major mode according to that file name. |
| 4188 | However, the mode will not be changed if |
| 4189 | (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or |
| 4190 | (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, |
| 4191 | not suitable for ordinary files, or |
| 4192 | (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. |
| 4193 | |
| 4194 | This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. |
| 4195 | |
| 4196 | However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then |
| 4197 | these commands do not change the major mode. |
| 4198 | |
| 4199 | ** M-x occur changes. |
| 4200 | |
| 4201 | *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, |
| 4202 | it performs a case-sensitive search. |
| 4203 | |
| 4204 | *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, |
| 4205 | if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search |
| 4206 | using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. |
| 4207 | |
| 4208 | ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted |
| 4209 | in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the |
| 4210 | window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in |
| 4211 | that window unless you select to another window which shows the same |
| 4212 | buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. |
| 4213 | |
| 4214 | ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates |
| 4215 | after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings |
| 4216 | appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents |
| 4217 | come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. |
| 4218 | |
| 4219 | ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
| 4220 | selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the |
| 4221 | buffers recently selected in the selected frame. |
| 4222 | |
| 4223 | ** Outline mode changes. |
| 4224 | |
| 4225 | *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). |
| 4226 | |
| 4227 | *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. |
| 4228 | |
| 4229 | ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if |
| 4230 | you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. |
| 4231 | Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that |
| 4232 | was already active. |
| 4233 | |
| 4234 | The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not |
| 4235 | unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then |
| 4236 | get confused by it. |
| 4237 | |
| 4238 | If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must |
| 4239 | set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 | ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. |
| 4242 | |
| 4243 | *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
| 4244 | conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first |
| 4245 | character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion |
| 4246 | including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. |
| 4247 | |
| 4248 | The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has |
| 4249 | mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always |
| 4250 | copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. |
| 4251 | |
| 4252 | *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' |
| 4253 | are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible |
| 4254 | values. |
| 4255 | |
| 4256 | `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve |
| 4257 | case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). |
| 4258 | `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore |
| 4259 | case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). |
| 4260 | |
| 4261 | ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a |
| 4262 | certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they |
| 4263 | can be. The default value is 30. |
| 4264 | |
| 4265 | ** Changes in Mail mode. |
| 4266 | |
| 4267 | *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. |
| 4268 | Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail |
| 4269 | composition mechanism you have selected with the variable |
| 4270 | `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is |
| 4271 | `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old |
| 4272 | behavior. |
| 4273 | |
| 4274 | C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs |
| 4275 | compose-mail-other-frame. |
| 4276 | |
| 4277 | *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use |
| 4278 | the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are |
| 4279 | replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the |
| 4280 | buffer that shows the original message. |
| 4281 | |
| 4282 | *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, |
| 4283 | with separator lines around the contents. |
| 4284 | |
| 4285 | *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases |
| 4286 | in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias |
| 4287 | definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not |
| 4288 | need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. |
| 4289 | |
| 4290 | *** New features in the mail-complete command. |
| 4291 | |
| 4292 | **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, |
| 4293 | for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style |
| 4294 | controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. |
| 4295 | Its values are like those of mail-from-style. |
| 4296 | |
| 4297 | **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command |
| 4298 | to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in |
| 4299 | /etc/passwd. |
| 4300 | |
| 4301 | **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read |
| 4302 | to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: |
| 4303 | /etc/passwd. |
| 4304 | |
| 4305 | ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of |
| 4306 | special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a |
| 4307 | directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a |
| 4308 | reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. |
| 4309 | |
| 4310 | Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as |
| 4311 | when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise |
| 4312 | be taken to be magic. |
| 4313 | |
| 4314 | ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select |
| 4315 | files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is |
| 4316 | available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. |
| 4317 | |
| 4318 | M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. |
| 4319 | (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) |
| 4320 | |
| 4321 | ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names |
| 4322 | suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. |
| 4323 | |
| 4324 | In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. |
| 4325 | |
| 4326 | new key dired.el binding old key |
| 4327 | ------- ---------------- ------- |
| 4328 | * c dired-change-marks c |
| 4329 | * m dired-mark m |
| 4330 | * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) |
| 4331 | * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) |
| 4332 | * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) |
| 4333 | * u dired-unmark u |
| 4334 | * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL |
| 4335 | * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? |
| 4336 | * ! dired-unmark-all-marks |
| 4337 | * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m |
| 4338 | * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} |
| 4339 | * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ |
| 4340 | |
| 4341 | ** Rmail changes. |
| 4342 | |
| 4343 | *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it |
| 4344 | saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer |
| 4345 | chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing |
| 4346 | each time you run it. |
| 4347 | |
| 4348 | *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls |
| 4349 | whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. |
| 4350 | |
| 4351 | *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete |
| 4352 | messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument |
| 4353 | means to move in the opposite direction. |
| 4354 | |
| 4355 | *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets |
| 4356 | you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. |
| 4357 | |
| 4358 | *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes |
| 4359 | just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. |
| 4360 | It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you |
| 4361 | can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used |
| 4362 | for output. |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 | ** Gnus changes. |
| 4365 | |
| 4366 | *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. |
| 4367 | |
| 4368 | *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
| 4369 | Gnus. |
| 4370 | |
| 4371 | *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like |
| 4372 | `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
| 4373 | |
| 4374 | *** Article washing status can be displayed in the |
| 4375 | article mode line. |
| 4376 | |
| 4377 | *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. |
| 4378 | |
| 4379 | *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 | (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) |
| 4382 | |
| 4383 | *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files |
| 4384 | are to be considered home score and adapt files. See |
| 4385 | `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. |
| 4386 | |
| 4387 | *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. |
| 4388 | |
| 4389 | *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. |
| 4390 | |
| 4391 | *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. |
| 4392 | See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. |
| 4393 | |
| 4394 | *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. |
| 4395 | Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be |
| 4396 | used to pick articles. |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 | *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to |
| 4399 | another have been added. |
| 4400 | |
| 4401 | `M-x gnus-change-server' |
| 4402 | |
| 4403 | *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when |
| 4404 | generating lines in buffers. |
| 4405 | |
| 4406 | *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with |
| 4407 | `M-C-_'. |
| 4408 | |
| 4409 | *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. |
| 4410 | |
| 4411 | *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: |
| 4412 | |
| 4413 | (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) |
| 4414 | |
| 4415 | *** Scores can be decayed. |
| 4416 | |
| 4417 | (setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
| 4418 | |
| 4419 | *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The |
| 4420 | Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. |
| 4421 | |
| 4422 | *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from |
| 4423 | the native server. |
| 4424 | |
| 4425 | `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' |
| 4426 | |
| 4427 | *** A new command for reading collections of documents |
| 4428 | (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. |
| 4429 | |
| 4430 | *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. |
| 4431 | |
| 4432 | *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post |
| 4433 | even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. |
| 4434 | |
| 4435 | *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines |
| 4436 | (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 | Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such |
| 4439 | a group. |
| 4440 | |
| 4441 | *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard |
| 4442 | sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. |
| 4443 | |
| 4444 | See the commands under the `T S' submap. |
| 4445 | |
| 4446 | *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. |
| 4447 | |
| 4448 | See the commands under the `G P' submap. |
| 4449 | |
| 4450 | *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. |
| 4451 | |
| 4452 | Use the `Y c' command. |
| 4453 | |
| 4454 | *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. |
| 4455 | |
| 4456 | *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. |
| 4457 | |
| 4458 | `M-x nnmail-split-history' |
| 4459 | |
| 4460 | *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk |
| 4461 | from incoming mail before saving the mail. |
| 4462 | |
| 4463 | See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
| 4464 | |
| 4465 | *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. |
| 4466 | |
| 4467 | *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute |
| 4468 | the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. |
| 4469 | |
| 4470 | (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) |
| 4471 | |
| 4472 | Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically |
| 4473 | and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime |
| 4474 | from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this |
| 4475 | hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling |
| 4476 | this issue.) |
| 4477 | |
| 4478 | Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems |
| 4479 | automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a |
| 4480 | particular news group. This can be done by: |
| 4481 | |
| 4482 | (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) |
| 4483 | |
| 4484 | Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree |
| 4485 | of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under |
| 4486 | "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding |
| 4487 | system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both |
| 4488 | for reading and posting). |
| 4489 | |
| 4490 | CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form |
| 4491 | (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) |
| 4492 | Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the |
| 4493 | newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages |
| 4494 | there. |
| 4495 | |
| 4496 | Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by |
| 4497 | default. Here are some of these default settings: |
| 4498 | |
| 4499 | (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) |
| 4500 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) |
| 4501 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) |
| 4502 | (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) |
| 4503 | (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) |
| 4504 | |
| 4505 | When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; |
| 4506 | the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. |
| 4507 | |
| 4508 | ** CC mode changes. |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 | *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) |
| 4511 | code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global |
| 4512 | values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do |
| 4513 | this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. |
| 4514 | Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is |
| 4515 | loaded. |
| 4516 | |
| 4517 | If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, |
| 4518 | Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
| 4519 | style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
| 4520 | share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
| 4521 | c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you |
| 4522 | must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
| 4523 | |
| 4524 | *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name |
| 4525 | of the current buffer. |
| 4526 | |
| 4527 | *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because |
| 4528 | it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles |
| 4529 | of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. |
| 4530 | |
| 4531 | *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C |
| 4532 | style that the Python developers like. |
| 4533 | |
| 4534 | *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. |
| 4535 | This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, |
| 4536 | just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. |
| 4537 | |
| 4538 | ** VC Changes [new] |
| 4539 | |
| 4540 | ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
| 4541 | name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
| 4542 | directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). |
| 4543 | |
| 4544 | This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common |
| 4545 | master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other |
| 4546 | developers. |
| 4547 | |
| 4548 | You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q |
| 4549 | RET in a buffer visiting that file. |
| 4550 | |
| 4551 | *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by |
| 4552 | other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a |
| 4553 | writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then |
| 4554 | calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. |
| 4555 | |
| 4556 | *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for |
| 4557 | version numbers, based on the current state of the file. |
| 4558 | |
| 4559 | ** Calendar changes. |
| 4560 | |
| 4561 | A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses |
| 4562 | of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this |
| 4563 | for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. |
| 4564 | |
| 4565 | ** ps-print changes |
| 4566 | |
| 4567 | There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. |
| 4568 | |
| 4569 | *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns |
| 4570 | |
| 4571 | The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print |
| 4572 | formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: |
| 4573 | `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' |
| 4574 | `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' |
| 4575 | It defaults to `letter'. |
| 4576 | If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. |
| 4577 | |
| 4578 | The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation |
| 4579 | of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, |
| 4580 | non-nil means "landscape" mode. |
| 4581 | |
| 4582 | The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. |
| 4583 | It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. |
| 4584 | It defaults to 1. |
| 4585 | |
| 4586 | *** Horizontal layout |
| 4587 | |
| 4588 | The horizontal layout is determined by the variables |
| 4589 | `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. |
| 4590 | All are measured in points. |
| 4591 | |
| 4592 | *** Vertical layout |
| 4593 | |
| 4594 | The vertical layout is determined by the variables |
| 4595 | `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. |
| 4596 | All are measured in points. |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 | *** Headers |
| 4599 | |
| 4600 | If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then |
| 4601 | `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the |
| 4602 | margin above the text. |
| 4603 | |
| 4604 | If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy |
| 4605 | framing box is printed around the header. |
| 4606 | |
| 4607 | The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', |
| 4608 | `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. |
| 4609 | |
| 4610 | The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', |
| 4611 | `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and |
| 4612 | `ps-header-font-size'. |
| 4613 | |
| 4614 | *** Font managing |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 | The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be |
| 4617 | used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist |
| 4618 | `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding |
| 4619 | elements to this alist. |
| 4620 | |
| 4621 | The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font |
| 4622 | for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. |
| 4623 | |
| 4624 | ** hideshow changes. |
| 4625 | |
| 4626 | *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for |
| 4627 | C++, ; for lisp). |
| 4628 | |
| 4629 | *** Support for java-mode added. |
| 4630 | |
| 4631 | *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments |
| 4632 | in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. |
| 4633 | |
| 4634 | *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at |
| 4635 | the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
| 4636 | way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. |
| 4637 | |
| 4638 | *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more |
| 4639 | robust and a lot faster. |
| 4640 | |
| 4641 | *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
| 4642 | |
| 4643 | *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow |
| 4644 | to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the |
| 4645 | documentation for more details. |
| 4646 | |
| 4647 | ** Changes in Enriched mode. |
| 4648 | |
| 4649 | *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is |
| 4650 | filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent |
| 4651 | of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in |
| 4652 | use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled |
| 4653 | the next time unless the fill-column is different. |
| 4654 | |
| 4655 | *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs |
| 4656 | distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines |
| 4657 | as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked |
| 4658 | as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. |
| 4659 | |
| 4660 | ** Font Lock mode |
| 4661 | |
| 4662 | *** Custom support |
| 4663 | |
| 4664 | The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and |
| 4665 | font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the |
| 4666 | faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom |
| 4667 | group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in |
| 4668 | your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should |
| 4669 | consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. |
| 4670 | |
| 4671 | You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. |
| 4672 | |
| 4673 | *** Maximum decoration |
| 4674 | |
| 4675 | Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by |
| 4676 | default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level |
| 4677 | of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration |
| 4678 | supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil |
| 4679 | to get the old behavior. |
| 4680 | |
| 4681 | *** New support |
| 4682 | |
| 4683 | Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. |
| 4684 | |
| 4685 | Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes |
| 4686 | support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. |
| 4687 | |
| 4688 | *** Configurable support |
| 4689 | |
| 4690 | Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for |
| 4691 | additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, |
| 4692 | c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, |
| 4693 | java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a |
| 4694 | list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value |
| 4695 | of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the |
| 4696 | convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. |
| 4697 | |
| 4698 | Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever |
| 4699 | way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make |
| 4700 | it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. |
| 4701 | |
| 4702 | *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support |
| 4703 | |
| 4704 | You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own |
| 4705 | highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, |
| 4706 | for any mode. |
| 4707 | |
| 4708 | For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: |
| 4709 | |
| 4710 | (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) |
| 4711 | |
| 4712 | in your ~/.emacs. |
| 4713 | |
| 4714 | *** New faces |
| 4715 | |
| 4716 | Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and |
| 4717 | font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, |
| 4718 | distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought |
| 4719 | to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. |
| 4720 | |
| 4721 | *** Changes to fast-lock support mode |
| 4722 | |
| 4723 | The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process |
| 4724 | cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the |
| 4725 | same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. |
| 4726 | |
| 4727 | *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode |
| 4728 | |
| 4729 | The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify |
| 4730 | according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use |
| 4731 | the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If |
| 4732 | non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be |
| 4733 | refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only |
| 4734 | the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy |
| 4735 | Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. |
| 4736 | |
| 4737 | This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. |
| 4738 | For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if |
| 4739 | this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly |
| 4740 | refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line |
| 4741 | containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use |
| 4742 | the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. |
| 4743 | |
| 4744 | As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: |
| 4745 | |
| 4746 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. |
| 4747 | Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. |
| 4748 | Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the |
| 4749 | new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. |
| 4750 | |
| 4751 | If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those |
| 4752 | settings. |
| 4753 | |
| 4754 | ** Ada mode changes. |
| 4755 | |
| 4756 | *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. |
| 4757 | If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same |
| 4758 | procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but |
| 4759 | you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure |
| 4760 | stubs. |
| 4761 | |
| 4762 | *** There are two new commands: |
| 4763 | - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer |
| 4764 | - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. |
| 4765 | |
| 4766 | The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', |
| 4767 | `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and |
| 4768 | `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
| 4769 | |
| 4770 | *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level |
| 4771 | is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. |
| 4772 | Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. |
| 4773 | |
| 4774 | *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of |
| 4775 | formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, |
| 4776 | places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one |
| 4777 | space between a comma and the beginning of a word. |
| 4778 | |
| 4779 | ** Scheme mode changes. |
| 4780 | |
| 4781 | *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp |
| 4782 | mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used |
| 4783 | for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables |
| 4784 | with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer |
| 4785 | have any effect. |
| 4786 | |
| 4787 | If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is |
| 4788 | still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to |
| 4789 | scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation |
| 4790 | variables as buffer-local variables. |
| 4791 | |
| 4792 | *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. |
| 4793 | Use M-x dsssl-mode. |
| 4794 | |
| 4795 | ** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
| 4796 | it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
| 4797 | buffer in Emacs. |
| 4798 | |
| 4799 | ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
| 4800 | constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point |
| 4801 | (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). |
| 4802 | |
| 4803 | ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, |
| 4804 | which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just |
| 4805 | the current defun. |
| 4806 | |
| 4807 | ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all |
| 4808 | following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. |
| 4809 | |
| 4810 | ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, |
| 4811 | and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if |
| 4812 | necessary). |
| 4813 | |
| 4814 | ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, |
| 4815 | if there are any registers that save positions in the file, |
| 4816 | these register values no longer become completely useless. |
| 4817 | If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are |
| 4818 | asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, |
| 4819 | it visits the file and then goes to the same position. |
| 4820 | |
| 4821 | ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for |
| 4822 | example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may |
| 4823 | be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever |
| 4824 | you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. |
| 4825 | |
| 4826 | You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the |
| 4827 | variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a |
| 4828 | file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and |
| 4829 | revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but |
| 4830 | only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. |
| 4831 | |
| 4832 | ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font |
| 4833 | since it applies only to the current frame. |
| 4834 | |
| 4835 | ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the |
| 4836 | file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, |
| 4837 | and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) |
| 4838 | |
| 4839 | This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of |
| 4840 | multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local |
| 4841 | variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for |
| 4842 | tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document |
| 4843 | instead of just the file you are editing. |
| 4844 | |
| 4845 | ** RefTeX mode |
| 4846 | |
| 4847 | RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref |
| 4848 | and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of |
| 4849 | different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for |
| 4850 | multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and |
| 4851 | turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: |
| 4852 | |
| 4853 | C-c ( reftex-label |
| 4854 | Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
| 4855 | knows which kind of label is needed. |
| 4856 | |
| 4857 | C-c ) reftex-reference |
| 4858 | Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the |
| 4859 | label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. |
| 4860 | |
| 4861 | C-c [ reftex-citation |
| 4862 | Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX |
| 4863 | database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. |
| 4864 | |
| 4865 | C-c & reftex-view-crossref |
| 4866 | Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. |
| 4867 | |
| 4868 | C-c = reftex-toc |
| 4869 | Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you |
| 4870 | can quickly jump to every section. |
| 4871 | |
| 4872 | Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
| 4873 | commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. |
| 4874 | Full documentation and customization examples are in the file |
| 4875 | reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: |
| 4876 | C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el |
| 4877 | |
| 4878 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
| 4879 | |
| 4880 | *** Info documentation is now available. |
| 4881 | |
| 4882 | *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused |
| 4883 | both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. |
| 4884 | |
| 4885 | *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to |
| 4886 | bibtex-user-optional-fields. |
| 4887 | |
| 4888 | *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote |
| 4889 | (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). |
| 4890 | |
| 4891 | *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete |
| 4892 | entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by |
| 4893 | appropriate functions. |
| 4894 | |
| 4895 | *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of |
| 4896 | entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. |
| 4897 | |
| 4898 | *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has |
| 4899 | been cleaned. |
| 4900 | |
| 4901 | *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables |
| 4902 | bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. |
| 4903 | |
| 4904 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries |
| 4905 | shall be delimited. |
| 4906 | |
| 4907 | *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of |
| 4908 | bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and |
| 4909 | bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. |
| 4910 | |
| 4911 | *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor |
| 4912 | field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are |
| 4913 | prefixed with `ALT'. |
| 4914 | |
| 4915 | *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable |
| 4916 | bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many |
| 4917 | formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable |
| 4918 | documentation). |
| 4919 | |
| 4920 | *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See |
| 4921 | documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions |
| 4922 | for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. |
| 4923 | |
| 4924 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if |
| 4925 | comma should be inserted at end of last field. |
| 4926 | |
| 4927 | *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if |
| 4928 | alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal |
| 4929 | signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). |
| 4930 | |
| 4931 | *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. |
| 4932 | |
| 4933 | *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. |
| 4934 | |
| 4935 | *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database |
| 4936 | from alien sources. |
| 4937 | |
| 4938 | *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) |
| 4939 | to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in |
| 4940 | crossref entries. |
| 4941 | |
| 4942 | *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or |
| 4943 | region. |
| 4944 | |
| 4945 | *** Added support for imenu. |
| 4946 | |
| 4947 | *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead |
| 4948 | of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a |
| 4949 | `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. |
| 4950 | `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. |
| 4951 | |
| 4952 | *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files |
| 4953 | from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. |
| 4954 | |
| 4955 | ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. |
| 4956 | |
| 4957 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
| 4958 | functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. |
| 4959 | Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory |
| 4960 | as an argument. |
| 4961 | |
| 4962 | When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read |
| 4963 | and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 | ** browse-url changes |
| 4966 | |
| 4967 | *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), |
| 4968 | Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window |
| 4969 | (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic |
| 4970 | non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated |
| 4971 | customization variables. |
| 4972 | |
| 4973 | *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. |
| 4974 | |
| 4975 | *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across |
| 4976 | lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps |
| 4977 | (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. |
| 4978 | |
| 4979 | ** Changes in Ediff |
| 4980 | |
| 4981 | *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel |
| 4982 | pops up the Info file for this command. |
| 4983 | |
| 4984 | *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether |
| 4985 | the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when |
| 4986 | merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different |
| 4987 | directories). |
| 4988 | |
| 4989 | *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare |
| 4990 | and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of |
| 4991 | files in the same directory. |
| 4992 | |
| 4993 | *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. |
| 4994 | The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug |
| 4995 | related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) |
| 4996 | |
| 4997 | ** Changes in Viper |
| 4998 | |
| 4999 | *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip |
| 5000 | *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
| 5001 | instead of vip-. |
| 5002 | *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. |
| 5003 | *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
| 5004 | Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
| 5005 | *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. |
| 5006 | *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. |
| 5007 | *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor |
| 5008 | color when Viper is in insert state. |
| 5009 | *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, |
| 5010 | Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable |
| 5011 | viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. |
| 5012 | |
| 5013 | ** Etags changes. |
| 5014 | |
| 5015 | *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by |
| 5016 | default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. |
| 5017 | Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag |
| 5018 | variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does |
| 5019 | not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. |
| 5020 | |
| 5021 | *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. |
| 5022 | |
| 5023 | *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" |
| 5024 | constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. |
| 5025 | |
| 5026 | *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are |
| 5027 | recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). |
| 5028 | In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. |
| 5029 | |
| 5030 | *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and |
| 5031 | C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags |
| 5032 | recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, |
| 5033 | methods and protocols. |
| 5034 | |
| 5035 | *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension |
| 5036 | .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in |
| 5037 | column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a |
| 5038 | paragraph name. |
| 5039 | |
| 5040 | *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of |
| 5041 | an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression |
| 5042 | at least M times and as many as N times. |
| 5043 | |
| 5044 | ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert |
| 5045 | in files has changed slightly. |
| 5046 | |
| 5047 | With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, |
| 5048 | time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. |
| 5049 | This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility |
| 5050 | with old time-stamp-format values. |
| 5051 | |
| 5052 | In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign |
| 5053 | (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. |
| 5054 | This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility |
| 5055 | reasons. |
| 5056 | |
| 5057 | In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their |
| 5058 | natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a |
| 5059 | fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon |
| 5060 | (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical |
| 5061 | time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are |
| 5062 | specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". |
| 5063 | |
| 5064 | Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the |
| 5065 | case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit |
| 5066 | truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. |
| 5067 | |
| 5068 | The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are |
| 5069 | being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the |
| 5070 | future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being |
| 5071 | recommended now will continue to work then. |
| 5072 | |
| 5073 | See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for |
| 5074 | details. |
| 5075 | |
| 5076 | ** There are some additional major modes: |
| 5077 | |
| 5078 | dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. |
| 5079 | m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. |
| 5080 | meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. |
| 5081 | |
| 5082 | ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you |
| 5083 | copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell |
| 5084 | into Emacs. |
| 5085 | |
| 5086 | ** New Lisp packages include: |
| 5087 | |
| 5088 | *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. |
| 5089 | |
| 5090 | *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might |
| 5091 | be used for adding some indecent words to your email. |
| 5092 | |
| 5093 | *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. |
| 5094 | |
| 5095 | *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes |
| 5096 | in shell buffers. |
| 5097 | |
| 5098 | *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. |
| 5099 | See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' |
| 5100 | and `elint-defun'. |
| 5101 | |
| 5102 | *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is |
| 5103 | meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary |
| 5104 | ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within |
| 5105 | strings or comments. |
| 5106 | |
| 5107 | These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an |
| 5108 | abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, |
| 5109 | you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these |
| 5110 | insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text |
| 5111 | at these points. |
| 5112 | |
| 5113 | *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you |
| 5114 | can visit them by short forms of their names. |
| 5115 | |
| 5116 | *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded |
| 5117 | Emacs Lisp function at point. |
| 5118 | |
| 5119 | *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. |
| 5120 | |
| 5121 | *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like |
| 5122 | switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. |
| 5123 | |
| 5124 | *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. |
| 5125 | |
| 5126 | *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. |
| 5127 | |
| 5128 | *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. |
| 5129 | |
| 5130 | *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations |
| 5131 | from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. |
| 5132 | |
| 5133 | *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. |
| 5134 | You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically |
| 5135 | inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its |
| 5136 | original place after inserting the copy. |
| 5137 | |
| 5138 | *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 |
| 5139 | on the buffer. |
| 5140 | |
| 5141 | You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the |
| 5142 | velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll |
| 5143 | (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. |
| 5144 | |
| 5145 | Enable mouse-drag with: |
| 5146 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) |
| 5147 | -or- |
| 5148 | (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) |
| 5149 | |
| 5150 | *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have |
| 5151 | mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. |
| 5152 | |
| 5153 | *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. |
| 5154 | It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. |
| 5155 | |
| 5156 | *** ogonek |
| 5157 | |
| 5158 | The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of |
| 5159 | Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various |
| 5160 | platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and |
| 5161 | TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to |
| 5162 | ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to |
| 5163 | prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for |
| 5164 | instance) and vice versa. |
| 5165 | |
| 5166 | To use this package load it using |
| 5167 | M-x load-library [enter] ogonek |
| 5168 | Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of |
| 5169 | M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
| 5170 | M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
| 5171 | The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the |
| 5172 | ways of customization in `.emacs'. |
| 5173 | |
| 5174 | *** Interface to ph. |
| 5175 | |
| 5176 | Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) |
| 5177 | |
| 5178 | The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory |
| 5179 | services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to |
| 5180 | these servers. |
| 5181 | |
| 5182 | *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. |
| 5183 | |
| 5184 | *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. |
| 5185 | You can move the virtual cursor with special commands |
| 5186 | while the real cursor does not move. |
| 5187 | |
| 5188 | *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up |
| 5189 | for visiting your favorite web sites. |
| 5190 | |
| 5191 | *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, |
| 5192 | so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. |
| 5193 | |
| 5194 | ** movemail change |
| 5195 | |
| 5196 | Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP |
| 5197 | mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer |
| 5198 | supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the |
| 5199 | user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. |
| 5200 | |
| 5201 | This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. |
| 5202 | \f |
| 5203 | * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
| 5204 | |
| 5205 | ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. |
| 5206 | |
| 5207 | Emacs handles three different conventions for representing |
| 5208 | end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the |
| 5209 | Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific |
| 5210 | file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special |
| 5211 | file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. |
| 5212 | |
| 5213 | To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use |
| 5214 | C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different |
| 5215 | coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly |
| 5216 | specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with |
| 5217 | LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to |
| 5218 | save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. |
| 5219 | \f |
| 5220 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
| 5221 | |
| 5222 | ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in |
| 5223 | Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And |
| 5224 | vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in |
| 5225 | Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. |
| 5226 | |
| 5227 | ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed |
| 5228 | to start with w32- instead of win32-. |
| 5229 | |
| 5230 | In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We |
| 5231 | don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it |
| 5232 | "win". |
| 5233 | |
| 5234 | ** Basic Lisp changes |
| 5235 | |
| 5236 | *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically |
| 5237 | evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. |
| 5238 | |
| 5239 | *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now |
| 5240 | be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program |
| 5241 | or by the user. |
| 5242 | |
| 5243 | The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. |
| 5244 | |
| 5245 | *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' |
| 5246 | |
| 5247 | (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) |
| 5248 | (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) |
| 5249 | |
| 5250 | *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their |
| 5251 | usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of |
| 5252 | its argument. |
| 5253 | |
| 5254 | *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. |
| 5255 | |
| 5256 | *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. |
| 5257 | |
| 5258 | *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. |
| 5259 | |
| 5260 | *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an |
| 5261 | error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives |
| 5262 | include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the |
| 5263 | `format' function. |
| 5264 | |
| 5265 | *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el |
| 5266 | or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file |
| 5267 | whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. |
| 5268 | |
| 5269 | *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain |
| 5270 | either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on |
| 5271 | adding one of these suffixes. |
| 5272 | |
| 5273 | *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE |
| 5274 | which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. |
| 5275 | If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
| 5276 | |
| 5277 | We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, |
| 5278 | because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. |
| 5279 | |
| 5280 | *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. |
| 5281 | |
| 5282 | *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. |
| 5283 | You must load the `cl' library to define it. |
| 5284 | |
| 5285 | *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression |
| 5286 | conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: |
| 5287 | |
| 5288 | (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) |
| 5289 | |
| 5290 | BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. |
| 5291 | BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. |
| 5292 | |
| 5293 | *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the |
| 5294 | choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or |
| 5295 | restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' |
| 5296 | works using `save-current-buffer'. |
| 5297 | |
| 5298 | *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and |
| 5299 | write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value |
| 5300 | of the last form. |
| 5301 | |
| 5302 | *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, |
| 5303 | which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the |
| 5304 | last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) |
| 5305 | as the last form. |
| 5306 | |
| 5307 | *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain |
| 5308 | characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the |
| 5309 | matches. |
| 5310 | |
| 5311 | For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). |
| 5312 | |
| 5313 | *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions |
| 5314 | with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. |
| 5315 | Then it returns that string. |
| 5316 | |
| 5317 | For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', |
| 5318 | |
| 5319 | (with-output-to-string |
| 5320 | (princ "The buffer is ") |
| 5321 | (princ (buffer-name))) |
| 5322 | |
| 5323 | returns "The buffer is foo". |
| 5324 | |
| 5325 | ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters |
| 5326 | is non-nil. |
| 5327 | |
| 5328 | These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the |
| 5329 | buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte |
| 5330 | characters that occupy several buffer positions each. |
| 5331 | |
| 5332 | *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in |
| 5333 | a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). |
| 5334 | |
| 5335 | Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; |
| 5336 | character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. |
| 5337 | Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer |
| 5338 | position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole |
| 5339 | characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to |
| 5340 | (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). |
| 5341 | |
| 5342 | ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. |
| 5343 | Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent |
| 5344 | non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte |
| 5345 | characters". |
| 5346 | |
| 5347 | The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 |
| 5348 | through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called |
| 5349 | "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the |
| 5350 | range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the |
| 5351 | leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. |
| 5352 | |
| 5353 | *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore |
| 5354 | (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a |
| 5355 | multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a |
| 5356 | character, which may be more than one buffer position. |
| 5357 | |
| 5358 | This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is |
| 5359 | always one buffer position, need to be changed. |
| 5360 | |
| 5361 | However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. |
| 5362 | |
| 5363 | *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
| 5364 | because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters |
| 5365 | have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, |
| 5366 | the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, |
| 5367 | guaranteed. |
| 5368 | |
| 5369 | *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is |
| 5370 | between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a |
| 5371 | character). |
| 5372 | |
| 5373 | When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: |
| 5374 | |
| 5375 | 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, |
| 5376 | 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, |
| 5377 | 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, |
| 5378 | 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, |
| 5379 | 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. |
| 5380 | |
| 5381 | *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. |
| 5382 | |
| 5383 | *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function |
| 5384 | `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be |
| 5385 | more than the number of characters. |
| 5386 | |
| 5387 | You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing |
| 5388 | it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, |
| 5389 | \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which |
| 5390 | is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to |
| 5391 | follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and |
| 5392 | newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. |
| 5393 | |
| 5394 | *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters |
| 5395 | and returns a string containing those characters. |
| 5396 | |
| 5397 | *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. |
| 5398 | (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX |
| 5399 | counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a |
| 5400 | character, sref signals an error. |
| 5401 | |
| 5402 | *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters |
| 5403 | in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the |
| 5404 | string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
| 5405 | |
| 5406 | *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters |
| 5407 | in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the |
| 5408 | region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
| 5409 | |
| 5410 | *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of |
| 5411 | the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string |
| 5412 | to a vector of the characters in it. |
| 5413 | |
| 5414 | *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents |
| 5415 | of a string. You call it as follows: |
| 5416 | |
| 5417 | (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) |
| 5418 | |
| 5419 | This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in |
| 5420 | STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. |
| 5421 | This function really does alter the contents of STRING. |
| 5422 | Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, |
| 5423 | it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. |
| 5424 | |
| 5425 | *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, |
| 5426 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
| 5427 | |
| 5428 | *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, |
| 5429 | if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
| 5430 | |
| 5431 | *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, |
| 5432 | to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does |
| 5433 | not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string |
| 5434 | which contains all or just part of the existing string.) |
| 5435 | |
| 5436 | (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) |
| 5437 | |
| 5438 | This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. |
| 5439 | |
| 5440 | The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. |
| 5441 | If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string |
| 5442 | are not included in the resulting value. |
| 5443 | |
| 5444 | The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added |
| 5445 | at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly |
| 5446 | WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING |
| 5447 | is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. |
| 5448 | |
| 5449 | If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean |
| 5450 | place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one |
| 5451 | character extends across that column), then the padding character |
| 5452 | PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result |
| 5453 | string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at |
| 5454 | column START-COLUMN. |
| 5455 | |
| 5456 | *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, |
| 5457 | the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not |
| 5458 | necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the |
| 5459 | difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the |
| 5460 | changed text, before the change. |
| 5461 | |
| 5462 | *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character |
| 5463 | sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is |
| 5464 | one character set for each script, not for each language. |
| 5465 | |
| 5466 | **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. |
| 5467 | |
| 5468 | **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. |
| 5469 | |
| 5470 | **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character |
| 5471 | set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) |
| 5472 | |
| 5473 | **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the |
| 5474 | name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values |
| 5475 | which identify the character within that character set. |
| 5476 | |
| 5477 | **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent |
| 5478 | byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the |
| 5479 | opposite of split-char. |
| 5480 | |
| 5481 | **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets |
| 5482 | of all the characters between BEG and END. |
| 5483 | |
| 5484 | **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets |
| 5485 | of all the characters in a string. |
| 5486 | |
| 5487 | *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems |
| 5488 | and specifying coding systems. |
| 5489 | |
| 5490 | **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding |
| 5491 | system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list |
| 5492 | of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. |
| 5493 | (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix |
| 5494 | and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well |
| 5495 | as what to do about code conversion.) |
| 5496 | |
| 5497 | **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system |
| 5498 | name. It returns t if so, nil if not. |
| 5499 | |
| 5500 | **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
| 5501 | for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
| 5502 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. |
| 5503 | |
| 5504 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
| 5505 | which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp |
| 5506 | to match against a file name. |
| 5507 | |
| 5508 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
| 5509 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
| 5510 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
| 5511 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
| 5512 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
| 5513 | specifies the coding system for encoding. |
| 5514 | |
| 5515 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
| 5516 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
| 5517 | |
| 5518 | **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies |
| 5519 | the coding system to use for network sockets. |
| 5520 | |
| 5521 | Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
| 5522 | which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be |
| 5523 | either a port number or a regular expression matching some network |
| 5524 | service names. |
| 5525 | |
| 5526 | VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
| 5527 | a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
| 5528 | decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
| 5529 | to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
| 5530 | systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
| 5531 | specifies the coding system for encoding. |
| 5532 | |
| 5533 | If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
| 5534 | or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
| 5535 | |
| 5536 | **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
| 5537 | for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
| 5538 | except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to |
| 5539 | start the subprocess. |
| 5540 | |
| 5541 | **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding |
| 5542 | systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, |
| 5543 | when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell |
| 5544 | (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output |
| 5545 | to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. |
| 5546 | |
| 5547 | **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the |
| 5548 | coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous |
| 5549 | subprocess. |
| 5550 | |
| 5551 | It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, |
| 5552 | but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you |
| 5553 | start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or |
| 5554 | connection permanently or until overridden. |
| 5555 | |
| 5556 | The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over |
| 5557 | file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and |
| 5558 | network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a |
| 5559 | coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. |
| 5560 | It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding |
| 5561 | system for one operation at a time. |
| 5562 | |
| 5563 | **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from |
| 5564 | files, subprocesses or network connections. |
| 5565 | |
| 5566 | **** The function process-coding-system tells you what |
| 5567 | coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. |
| 5568 | The value is a cons cell, |
| 5569 | (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) |
| 5570 | where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from |
| 5571 | the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding |
| 5572 | input to the subprocess. |
| 5573 | |
| 5574 | **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to |
| 5575 | change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. |
| 5576 | |
| 5577 | ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many |
| 5578 | customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, |
| 5579 | you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. |
| 5580 | |
| 5581 | You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option |
| 5582 | variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of |
| 5583 | information (usually): the "type" which says what values are |
| 5584 | legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for |
| 5585 | customization. |
| 5586 | |
| 5587 | Thus, instead of writing |
| 5588 | |
| 5589 | (defvar foo-blurgoze nil |
| 5590 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") |
| 5591 | |
| 5592 | you would now write this: |
| 5593 | |
| 5594 | (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil |
| 5595 | "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." |
| 5596 | :type 'boolean |
| 5597 | :group foo) |
| 5598 | |
| 5599 | The type `boolean' means that this variable has only |
| 5600 | two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values |
| 5601 | describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom |
| 5602 | for a description of them. |
| 5603 | |
| 5604 | The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option |
| 5605 | should belong to. You define a new group like this: |
| 5606 | |
| 5607 | (defgroup ispell nil |
| 5608 | "Spell checking using Ispell." |
| 5609 | :group 'processes) |
| 5610 | |
| 5611 | The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root |
| 5612 | group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, |
| 5613 | but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond |
| 5614 | to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come |
| 5615 | second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. |
| 5616 | |
| 5617 | Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple |
| 5618 | package should have just one group; a more complex package should |
| 5619 | have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a |
| 5620 | package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" |
| 5621 | first-level subgroups. |
| 5622 | |
| 5623 | ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. |
| 5624 | |
| 5625 | This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a |
| 5626 | separate manual that accompanies Emacs. |
| 5627 | |
| 5628 | ** easy-mmode |
| 5629 | |
| 5630 | The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make |
| 5631 | developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code |
| 5632 | only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, |
| 5633 | predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro |
| 5634 | `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also |
| 5635 | `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. |
| 5636 | |
| 5637 | ** Text property changes |
| 5638 | |
| 5639 | *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a |
| 5640 | text property. |
| 5641 | |
| 5642 | *** The new functions next-char-property-change and |
| 5643 | previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a |
| 5644 | place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The |
| 5645 | functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the |
| 5646 | starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. |
| 5647 | |
| 5648 | If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If |
| 5649 | LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part |
| 5650 | of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the |
| 5651 | position of the beginning or end of the buffer. |
| 5652 | |
| 5653 | *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property |
| 5654 | value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This |
| 5655 | is an alternative to using the keymap itself. |
| 5656 | |
| 5657 | ** Changes in invisibility features |
| 5658 | |
| 5659 | *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are |
| 5660 | hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match |
| 5661 | is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay |
| 5662 | should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that |
| 5663 | would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should |
| 5664 | make the overlay visible. |
| 5665 | |
| 5666 | During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the |
| 5667 | invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are |
| 5668 | needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary |
| 5669 | which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is |
| 5670 | the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and |
| 5671 | t when it should hide it. |
| 5672 | |
| 5673 | *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec |
| 5674 | |
| 5675 | Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the |
| 5676 | invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
| 5677 | and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. |
| 5678 | Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
| 5679 | manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
| 5680 | Here is an example of how to do this: |
| 5681 | |
| 5682 | ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: |
| 5683 | (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
| 5684 | ;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
| 5685 | (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
| 5686 | |
| 5687 | ... |
| 5688 | (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) |
| 5689 | |
| 5690 | ... |
| 5691 | ;; When done with the overlays: |
| 5692 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
| 5693 | ;; Or respectively: |
| 5694 | (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
| 5695 | |
| 5696 | ** Changes in syntax parsing. |
| 5697 | |
| 5698 | *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as |
| 5699 | `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now |
| 5700 | obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable |
| 5701 | `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. |
| 5702 | |
| 5703 | If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior |
| 5704 | is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always |
| 5705 | used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. |
| 5706 | |
| 5707 | When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a |
| 5708 | character in the buffer is calculated thus: |
| 5709 | |
| 5710 | a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character |
| 5711 | is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; |
| 5712 | |
| 5713 | Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid |
| 5714 | syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., |
| 5715 | a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). |
| 5716 | |
| 5717 | b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property |
| 5718 | is a syntax table, this syntax table is used |
| 5719 | (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to |
| 5720 | determine the syntax type of the character. |
| 5721 | |
| 5722 | c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table |
| 5723 | of the current buffer. |
| 5724 | |
| 5725 | *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the |
| 5726 | value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as |
| 5727 | for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. |
| 5728 | |
| 5729 | *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 |
| 5730 | and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended |
| 5731 | only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A |
| 5732 | character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by |
| 5733 | another character with the same code (unless quoted). |
| 5734 | |
| 5735 | These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' |
| 5736 | text property. |
| 5737 | |
| 5738 | *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth |
| 5739 | arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start |
| 5740 | of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. |
| 5741 | |
| 5742 | *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' |
| 5743 | (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth |
| 5744 | element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; |
| 5745 | nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the |
| 5746 | string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. |
| 5747 | |
| 5748 | *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete |
| 5749 | syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports |
| 5750 | `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. |
| 5751 | |
| 5752 | ** Changes in face features |
| 5753 | |
| 5754 | *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even |
| 5755 | if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. |
| 5756 | |
| 5757 | *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string |
| 5758 | of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). |
| 5759 | |
| 5760 | *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. |
| 5761 | set-face-bold-p sets that flag. |
| 5762 | |
| 5763 | *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. |
| 5764 | set-face-italic-p sets that flag. |
| 5765 | |
| 5766 | *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text |
| 5767 | by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) |
| 5768 | and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in |
| 5769 | the `face' property (either the character's text property or an |
| 5770 | overlay property). |
| 5771 | |
| 5772 | This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use |
| 5773 | arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. |
| 5774 | |
| 5775 | ** Changes in file-handling functions |
| 5776 | |
| 5777 | *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant |
| 5778 | directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, |
| 5779 | they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion |
| 5780 | is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. |
| 5781 | |
| 5782 | This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name |
| 5783 | begins with ~. |
| 5784 | |
| 5785 | *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, |
| 5786 | it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. |
| 5787 | |
| 5788 | *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
| 5789 | the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. |
| 5790 | |
| 5791 | *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, |
| 5792 | as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. |
| 5793 | |
| 5794 | *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses |
| 5795 | character code conversion as well as other things. |
| 5796 | |
| 5797 | Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names |
| 5798 | (formerly it did not). |
| 5799 | |
| 5800 | *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR |
| 5801 | environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. |
| 5802 | |
| 5803 | *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps |
| 5804 | instead of constant strings. |
| 5805 | |
| 5806 | *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used |
| 5807 | to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of |
| 5808 | any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. |
| 5809 | |
| 5810 | substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, |
| 5811 | in the same way as before. |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 | *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. |
| 5814 | The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings |
| 5815 | which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. |
| 5816 | |
| 5817 | *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an |
| 5818 | error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing |
| 5819 | else, and returns nil. |
| 5820 | |
| 5821 | *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified |
| 5822 | directory cannot be listed. |
| 5823 | |
| 5824 | ** Changes in minibuffer input |
| 5825 | |
| 5826 | *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string |
| 5827 | read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an |
| 5828 | additional argument which specifies the default value. If this |
| 5829 | argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two |
| 5830 | ways: |
| 5831 | |
| 5832 | It is returned if the user enters empty input. |
| 5833 | It is available through the history command M-n. |
| 5834 | |
| 5835 | *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, |
| 5836 | read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional |
| 5837 | argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the |
| 5838 | minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of |
| 5839 | enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. |
| 5840 | |
| 5841 | In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an |
| 5842 | argument in this way. |
| 5843 | |
| 5844 | *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties |
| 5845 | from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable |
| 5846 | minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. |
| 5847 | |
| 5848 | ** Echo area features |
| 5849 | |
| 5850 | *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook |
| 5851 | echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the |
| 5852 | minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active |
| 5853 | after the echo area is cleared. |
| 5854 | |
| 5855 | *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed |
| 5856 | in the echo area, or nil if there is none. |
| 5857 | |
| 5858 | ** Keyboard input features |
| 5859 | |
| 5860 | *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was |
| 5861 | set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. |
| 5862 | |
| 5863 | *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events |
| 5864 | received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated |
| 5865 | by keyboard macros. |
| 5866 | |
| 5867 | ** Frame-related changes |
| 5868 | |
| 5869 | *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before |
| 5870 | creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal |
| 5871 | hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. |
| 5872 | |
| 5873 | *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time |
| 5874 | the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration |
| 5875 | has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. |
| 5876 | |
| 5877 | *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
| 5878 | selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the |
| 5879 | value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed |
| 5880 | in the selected frame. |
| 5881 | |
| 5882 | *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars |
| 5883 | is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies |
| 5884 | which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. |
| 5885 | |
| 5886 | ** X Windows features |
| 5887 | |
| 5888 | *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding |
| 5889 | x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of |
| 5890 | x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. |
| 5891 | |
| 5892 | *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. |
| 5893 | The menu displays the current status of the box or button. |
| 5894 | |
| 5895 | *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument |
| 5896 | MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. |
| 5897 | A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. |
| 5898 | |
| 5899 | If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, |
| 5900 | it is good to supply 1 for this argument. |
| 5901 | |
| 5902 | ** Subprocess features |
| 5903 | |
| 5904 | *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter |
| 5905 | functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this |
| 5906 | automatically. |
| 5907 | |
| 5908 | *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command |
| 5909 | and returns the output from the command as a string. |
| 5910 | |
| 5911 | *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, |
| 5912 | and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. |
| 5913 | |
| 5914 | ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook |
| 5915 | does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. |
| 5916 | |
| 5917 | ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes |
| 5918 | at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it |
| 5919 | goes after the other menu items. |
| 5920 | |
| 5921 | ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area |
| 5922 | of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
| 5923 | around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
| 5924 | are in use. |
| 5925 | |
| 5926 | The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a |
| 5927 | series of several changes--if that seems safe. |
| 5928 | |
| 5929 | Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and |
| 5930 | after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls |
| 5931 | form. |
| 5932 | |
| 5933 | ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION |
| 5934 | is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, |
| 5935 | but its hook is still run. |
| 5936 | |
| 5937 | ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) |
| 5938 | for errors that are handled by condition-case. |
| 5939 | |
| 5940 | If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called |
| 5941 | regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is |
| 5942 | useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. |
| 5943 | |
| 5944 | This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that |
| 5945 | are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process |
| 5946 | filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't |
| 5947 | warned. |
| 5948 | |
| 5949 | ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own |
| 5950 | way for Emacs to "ring the bell". |
| 5951 | |
| 5952 | ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at |
| 5953 | integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for |
| 5954 | functions like display-time. |
| 5955 | |
| 5956 | ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file |
| 5957 | name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. |
| 5958 | |
| 5959 | ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that |
| 5960 | can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode |
| 5961 | is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. |
| 5962 | |
| 5963 | ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code |
| 5964 | if there is an error in compilation. |
| 5965 | |
| 5966 | ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and |
| 5967 | switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional |
| 5968 | argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, |
| 5969 | they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. |
| 5970 | |
| 5971 | ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, |
| 5972 | Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing |
| 5973 | the *scratch* buffer. |
| 5974 | |
| 5975 | ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. |
| 5976 | The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used |
| 5977 | where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, |
| 5978 | e.g., in Font Lock mode. |
| 5979 | |
| 5980 | ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, |
| 5981 | and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. |
| 5982 | It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. |
| 5983 | |
| 5984 | ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message |
| 5985 | using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the |
| 5986 | variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window |
| 5987 | and compose-mail-other-frame. |
| 5988 | |
| 5989 | ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which |
| 5990 | can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The |
| 5991 | full name of the specified user will be returned. |
| 5992 | |
| 5993 | ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort |
| 5994 | of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding |
| 5995 | where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found |
| 5996 | in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q |
| 5997 | option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization |
| 5998 | files at all. |
| 5999 | |
| 6000 | ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width |
| 6001 | and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field |
| 6002 | width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start |
| 6003 | the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. |
| 6004 | |
| 6005 | For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the |
| 6006 | minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad |
| 6007 | with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that |
| 6008 | is how %S normally pads to two positions. |
| 6009 | |
| 6010 | ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. |
| 6011 | |
| 6012 | ** imenu.el changes. |
| 6013 | |
| 6014 | You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an |
| 6015 | item from menu created by imenu. |
| 6016 | |
| 6017 | An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the |
| 6018 | #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we |
| 6019 | select one of those items. |
| 6020 | \f |
| 6021 | * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
| 6022 | \f |
| 6023 | * Changes in Emacs 19.33. |
| 6024 | |
| 6025 | ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major |
| 6026 | mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) |
| 6027 | |
| 6028 | ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to |
| 6029 | use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. |
| 6030 | Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. |
| 6031 | \f |
| 6032 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 |
| 6033 | |
| 6034 | ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. |
| 6035 | To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. |
| 6036 | |
| 6037 | ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
| 6038 | conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it |
| 6039 | matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the |
| 6040 | expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional |
| 6041 | word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is |
| 6042 | all caps. |
| 6043 | |
| 6044 | ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame |
| 6045 | at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. |
| 6046 | |
| 6047 | When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 |
| 6048 | does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same |
| 6049 | as in previous Emacs versions. |
| 6050 | |
| 6051 | ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a |
| 6052 | non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any |
| 6053 | time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple |
| 6054 | frames. |
| 6055 | |
| 6056 | ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value |
| 6057 | if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. |
| 6058 | This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the |
| 6059 | Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by |
| 6060 | accident. |
| 6061 | |
| 6062 | ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined |
| 6063 | keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. |
| 6064 | It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that |
| 6065 | line and then executing the macro. |
| 6066 | |
| 6067 | This command is not new, but was never documented before. |
| 6068 | |
| 6069 | ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant |
| 6070 | (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter |
| 6071 | characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting |
| 6072 | characters. |
| 6073 | |
| 6074 | ** Font Lock mode |
| 6075 | |
| 6076 | *** Font Lock support modes |
| 6077 | |
| 6078 | Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see |
| 6079 | below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the |
| 6080 | hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode |
| 6081 | to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when |
| 6082 | Font Lock mode is enabled. |
| 6083 | |
| 6084 | For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: |
| 6085 | |
| 6086 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) |
| 6087 | |
| 6088 | in your ~/.emacs. |
| 6089 | |
| 6090 | *** lazy-lock |
| 6091 | |
| 6092 | The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur |
| 6093 | only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer |
| 6094 | becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and |
| 6095 | Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events |
| 6096 | occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the |
| 6097 | buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until |
| 6098 | Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. |
| 6099 | |
| 6100 | To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: |
| 6101 | |
| 6102 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) |
| 6103 | |
| 6104 | To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. |
| 6105 | |
| 6106 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
| 6107 | |
| 6108 | *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or |
| 6109 | paren and key. |
| 6110 | |
| 6111 | *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now |
| 6112 | supported. |
| 6113 | |
| 6114 | ** Gnus changes. |
| 6115 | |
| 6116 | Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new |
| 6117 | commands and variables have been added. There should be no |
| 6118 | significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the |
| 6119 | previously released version, except in the message composition area. |
| 6120 | |
| 6121 | Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes |
| 6122 | between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. |
| 6123 | |
| 6124 | *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization |
| 6125 | variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now |
| 6126 | obsolete. |
| 6127 | |
| 6128 | *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where |
| 6129 | missing articles are represented by empty nodes. |
| 6130 | |
| 6131 | (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) |
| 6132 | |
| 6133 | *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. |
| 6134 | |
| 6135 | To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) |
| 6136 | |
| 6137 | *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are |
| 6138 | referred. |
| 6139 | |
| 6140 | *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: |
| 6141 | |
| 6142 | (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) |
| 6143 | |
| 6144 | *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. |
| 6145 | |
| 6146 | (setq gnus-use-trees t) |
| 6147 | |
| 6148 | *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary |
| 6149 | buffers. |
| 6150 | |
| 6151 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) |
| 6152 | |
| 6153 | *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: |
| 6154 | |
| 6155 | `M-x gnus-binary-mode' |
| 6156 | |
| 6157 | *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. |
| 6158 | |
| 6159 | (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) |
| 6160 | |
| 6161 | *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. |
| 6162 | |
| 6163 | Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. |
| 6164 | |
| 6165 | *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency |
| 6166 | is possible. |
| 6167 | |
| 6168 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) |
| 6169 | |
| 6170 | *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on |
| 6171 | groups of groups. |
| 6172 | |
| 6173 | *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. |
| 6174 | |
| 6175 | *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news |
| 6176 | batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. |
| 6177 | |
| 6178 | *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. |
| 6179 | |
| 6180 | *** The Gnus cache is much faster. |
| 6181 | |
| 6182 | *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. |
| 6183 | |
| 6184 | For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) |
| 6185 | |
| 6186 | *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and |
| 6187 | expiration times. |
| 6188 | |
| 6189 | *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. |
| 6190 | |
| 6191 | *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on |
| 6192 | process marked articles on the `M P' submap. |
| 6193 | |
| 6194 | *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available |
| 6195 | articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been |
| 6196 | bound to keys on the `/' submap. |
| 6197 | |
| 6198 | *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving |
| 6199 | articles with the `*' command. |
| 6200 | |
| 6201 | *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. |
| 6202 | |
| 6203 | *** Article headers can be buttonized. |
| 6204 | |
| 6205 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) |
| 6206 | |
| 6207 | *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. |
| 6208 | |
| 6209 | *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the |
| 6210 | `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. |
| 6211 | |
| 6212 | *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article |
| 6213 | buffer. |
| 6214 | |
| 6215 | *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. |
| 6216 | |
| 6217 | *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. |
| 6218 | |
| 6219 | *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. |
| 6220 | |
| 6221 | (setq gnus-use-nocem t) |
| 6222 | |
| 6223 | *** Groups can be made permanently visible. |
| 6224 | |
| 6225 | (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") |
| 6226 | |
| 6227 | *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. |
| 6228 | |
| 6229 | *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. |
| 6230 | |
| 6231 | *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. |
| 6232 | |
| 6233 | (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function |
| 6234 | 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) |
| 6235 | |
| 6236 | *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid |
| 6237 | refetching. |
| 6238 | |
| 6239 | (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) |
| 6240 | |
| 6241 | *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate |
| 6242 | buffer to allow easier treatment. |
| 6243 | |
| 6244 | *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. |
| 6245 | |
| 6246 | *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. |
| 6247 | |
| 6248 | (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) |
| 6249 | |
| 6250 | *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching |
| 6251 | articles. |
| 6252 | |
| 6253 | (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) |
| 6254 | |
| 6255 | *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. |
| 6256 | |
| 6257 | *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much |
| 6258 | cited text to hide is now customizable. |
| 6259 | |
| 6260 | (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) |
| 6261 | |
| 6262 | *** Boring headers can be hidden. |
| 6263 | |
| 6264 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) |
| 6265 | |
| 6266 | *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. |
| 6267 | |
| 6268 | *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. |
| 6269 | |
| 6270 | The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features |
| 6271 | in greater detail. |
| 6272 | \f |
| 6273 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 |
| 6274 | |
| 6275 | ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional |
| 6276 | second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not |
| 6277 | asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already |
| 6278 | exists. |
| 6279 | |
| 6280 | ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, |
| 6281 | as well as lists. |
| 6282 | |
| 6283 | ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap |
| 6284 | of a given keymap. |
| 6285 | |
| 6286 | ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a |
| 6287 | given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a |
| 6288 | keymap or nil. |
| 6289 | |
| 6290 | ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really |
| 6291 | an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" |
| 6292 | name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil |
| 6293 | menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for |
| 6294 | equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the |
| 6295 | alias. |
| 6296 | \f |
| 6297 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 |
| 6298 | |
| 6299 | ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. |
| 6300 | |
| 6301 | Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. |
| 6302 | This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law |
| 6303 | was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans |
| 6304 | far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any |
| 6305 | pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. |
| 6306 | |
| 6307 | For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what |
| 6308 | you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site |
| 6309 | `http://www.vtw.org/'. |
| 6310 | |
| 6311 | ** A note about C mode indentation customization. |
| 6312 | |
| 6313 | The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style |
| 6314 | do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. |
| 6315 | It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are |
| 6316 | much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs |
| 6317 | chapter of the manual for details. |
| 6318 | |
| 6319 | However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old |
| 6320 | customization variables take effect. |
| 6321 | |
| 6322 | ** Marking with the mouse. |
| 6323 | |
| 6324 | When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains |
| 6325 | highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are |
| 6326 | using M-x transient-mark-mode. |
| 6327 | |
| 6328 | ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. |
| 6329 | |
| 6330 | *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. |
| 6331 | |
| 6332 | *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used |
| 6333 | to work on NT only and not on 95.) |
| 6334 | |
| 6335 | *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems |
| 6336 | in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as |
| 6337 | you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS |
| 6338 | application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS |
| 6339 | applications, these problems are significant. |
| 6340 | |
| 6341 | If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is |
| 6342 | likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. |
| 6343 | However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess |
| 6344 | will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any |
| 6345 | other DOS application as a subprocess. |
| 6346 | |
| 6347 | Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. |
| 6348 | You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. |
| 6349 | |
| 6350 | If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate |
| 6351 | subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably |
| 6352 | have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. |
| 6353 | Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two |
| 6354 | separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing |
| 6355 | Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. |
| 6356 | |
| 6357 | ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. |
| 6358 | |
| 6359 | This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in |
| 6360 | which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the |
| 6361 | minibuffer contains. |
| 6362 | |
| 6363 | ** `title' frame parameter and resource. |
| 6364 | |
| 6365 | The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. |
| 6366 | It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. |
| 6367 | It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise |
| 6368 | affects just the displayed title of the frame. |
| 6369 | |
| 6370 | The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: |
| 6371 | it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, |
| 6372 | and also serves as the default for the displayed title |
| 6373 | when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. |
| 6374 | |
| 6375 | ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new |
| 6376 | enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). |
| 6377 | |
| 6378 | ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the |
| 6379 | F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual |
| 6380 | Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. |
| 6381 | |
| 6382 | If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif |
| 6383 | menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add |
| 6384 | something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds |
| 6385 | the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: |
| 6386 | |
| 6387 | Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 |
| 6388 | |
| 6389 | ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases |
| 6390 | to replace the characters it "deletes". |
| 6391 | |
| 6392 | ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. |
| 6393 | |
| 6394 | ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts |
| 6395 | a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, |
| 6396 | select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. |
| 6397 | It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message |
| 6398 | immediately after the selected one. |
| 6399 | |
| 6400 | This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly |
| 6401 | made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. |
| 6402 | |
| 6403 | ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. |
| 6404 | |
| 6405 | Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home |
| 6406 | directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. |
| 6407 | If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If |
| 6408 | Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x |
| 6409 | recover-session. |
| 6410 | |
| 6411 | You can turn off the writing of these files by setting |
| 6412 | auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session |
| 6413 | will not work. |
| 6414 | |
| 6415 | Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on |
| 6416 | normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off |
| 6417 | this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this |
| 6418 | bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so |
| 6419 | now that the bug is fixed. |
| 6420 | |
| 6421 | ** Changes to Version Control (VC) |
| 6422 | |
| 6423 | There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do |
| 6424 | when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. |
| 6425 | Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, |
| 6426 | which is dangerous and probably not what you want. |
| 6427 | |
| 6428 | If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, |
| 6429 | telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), |
| 6430 | VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, |
| 6431 | the link is visited and a warning displayed. |
| 6432 | |
| 6433 | ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. |
| 6434 | Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which |
| 6435 | is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). |
| 6436 | |
| 6437 | There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and |
| 6438 | Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they |
| 6439 | enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. |
| 6440 | The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, |
| 6441 | remain normal. |
| 6442 | |
| 6443 | ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various |
| 6444 | header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). |
| 6445 | |
| 6446 | Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups |
| 6447 | known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header |
| 6448 | offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since |
| 6449 | Followup-To usually just holds one of those. |
| 6450 | |
| 6451 | Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list |
| 6452 | of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides |
| 6453 | a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user |
| 6454 | name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the |
| 6455 | documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and |
| 6456 | `mail-directory-stream'.) |
| 6457 | |
| 6458 | ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) |
| 6459 | skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named |
| 6460 | characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible |
| 6461 | with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. |
| 6462 | |
| 6463 | Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and |
| 6464 | - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be |
| 6465 | wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). |
| 6466 | |
| 6467 | The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or |
| 6468 | less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for |
| 6469 | headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / |
| 6470 | Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. |
| 6471 | Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to |
| 6472 | fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due |
| 6473 | to a limitation in font-lock). |
| 6474 | |
| 6475 | External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. |
| 6476 | |
| 6477 | ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current |
| 6478 | buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all |
| 6479 | buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in |
| 6480 | this example: |
| 6481 | |
| 6482 | (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook |
| 6483 | '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) |
| 6484 | |
| 6485 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
| 6486 | |
| 6487 | *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. |
| 6488 | |
| 6489 | *** Font Lock mode is now supported. |
| 6490 | |
| 6491 | *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. |
| 6492 | |
| 6493 | *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new |
| 6494 | entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting |
| 6495 | will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or |
| 6496 | isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c |
| 6497 | (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. |
| 6498 | The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. |
| 6499 | |
| 6500 | *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q |
| 6501 | does the same job. |
| 6502 | |
| 6503 | *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = |
| 6504 | "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. |
| 6505 | |
| 6506 | *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help |
| 6507 | text. |
| 6508 | |
| 6509 | ** Font Lock mode |
| 6510 | |
| 6511 | *** Global Font Lock mode |
| 6512 | |
| 6513 | Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the |
| 6514 | new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable |
| 6515 | font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically |
| 6516 | turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned |
| 6517 | on globally where the buffer mode supports it. |
| 6518 | |
| 6519 | For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: |
| 6520 | |
| 6521 | (global-font-lock-mode t) |
| 6522 | |
| 6523 | in your ~/.emacs. |
| 6524 | |
| 6525 | *** Local Refontification |
| 6526 | |
| 6527 | In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. |
| 6528 | However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, |
| 6529 | those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new |
| 6530 | command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). |
| 6531 | |
| 6532 | In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. |
| 6533 | (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the |
| 6534 | current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines |
| 6535 | above and below point. |
| 6536 | |
| 6537 | With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. |
| 6538 | |
| 6539 | ** Follow mode |
| 6540 | |
| 6541 | Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same |
| 6542 | buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two |
| 6543 | side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if |
| 6544 | they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, |
| 6545 | split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x |
| 6546 | follow-mode. |
| 6547 | |
| 6548 | M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. |
| 6549 | |
| 6550 | To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the |
| 6551 | command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. |
| 6552 | |
| 6553 | ** hide-show changes. |
| 6554 | |
| 6555 | The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed |
| 6556 | to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for |
| 6557 | normal hooks. |
| 6558 | |
| 6559 | ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. |
| 6560 | The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. |
| 6561 | |
| 6562 | ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are |
| 6563 | recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are |
| 6564 | those that begin a function, record, or macro. |
| 6565 | |
| 6566 | ** MSDOS Changes |
| 6567 | |
| 6568 | *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. |
| 6569 | Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. |
| 6570 | |
| 6571 | *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten |
| 6572 | and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. |
| 6573 | |
| 6574 | *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. |
| 6575 | |
| 6576 | *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously |
| 6577 | pressing both mouse buttons. |
| 6578 | |
| 6579 | *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had |
| 6580 | restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones |
| 6581 | are: |
| 6582 | |
| 6583 | **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) |
| 6584 | now works. |
| 6585 | |
| 6586 | **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). |
| 6587 | |
| 6588 | **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new |
| 6589 | implementation of Emacs timers, see below). |
| 6590 | |
| 6591 | **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. |
| 6592 | |
| 6593 | **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. |
| 6594 | |
| 6595 | **** `M-x recover-session' works. |
| 6596 | |
| 6597 | **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. |
| 6598 | |
| 6599 | **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. |
| 6600 | \f |
| 6601 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. |
| 6602 | |
| 6603 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 |
| 6604 | tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a |
| 6605 | remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in |
| 6606 | this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this |
| 6607 | behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. |
| 6608 | |
| 6609 | ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. |
| 6610 | |
| 6611 | The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', |
| 6612 | not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' |
| 6613 | need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also |
| 6614 | be different. |
| 6615 | |
| 6616 | It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather |
| 6617 | than `system-type'. |
| 6618 | |
| 6619 | See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. |
| 6620 | |
| 6621 | ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process |
| 6622 | now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. |
| 6623 | |
| 6624 | ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers |
| 6625 | that pointed into or next to the deleted text. |
| 6626 | |
| 6627 | ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and |
| 6628 | no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more |
| 6629 | reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. |
| 6630 | |
| 6631 | The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer |
| 6632 | to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks |
| 6633 | like this: |
| 6634 | |
| 6635 | (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) |
| 6636 | |
| 6637 | SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. |
| 6638 | It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer |
| 6639 | becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. |
| 6640 | |
| 6641 | REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in |
| 6642 | seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 |
| 6643 | means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. |
| 6644 | |
| 6645 | *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give |
| 6646 | up if too much time passes. |
| 6647 | |
| 6648 | (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) |
| 6649 | |
| 6650 | This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. |
| 6651 | If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value |
| 6652 | of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last |
| 6653 | form in BODY. |
| 6654 | |
| 6655 | *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for |
| 6656 | a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A |
| 6657 | call looks like this: |
| 6658 | |
| 6659 | (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) |
| 6660 | |
| 6661 | SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer |
| 6662 | runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the |
| 6663 | timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments |
| 6664 | ARGS. |
| 6665 | |
| 6666 | Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse |
| 6667 | command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse |
| 6668 | command. |
| 6669 | |
| 6670 | REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each |
| 6671 | time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer |
| 6672 | does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after |
| 6673 | each time Emacs becomes idle. |
| 6674 | |
| 6675 | If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is |
| 6676 | idle for SECS seconds. |
| 6677 | |
| 6678 | *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at |
| 6679 | all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your |
| 6680 | programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers |
| 6681 | instead. |
| 6682 | |
| 6683 | *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if |
| 6684 | there is no answer within a certain time. |
| 6685 | |
| 6686 | (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) |
| 6687 | |
| 6688 | asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers |
| 6689 | within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. |
| 6690 | Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. |
| 6691 | |
| 6692 | ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven |
| 6693 | arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual |
| 6694 | meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the |
| 6695 | arguments in between are ignored. |
| 6696 | |
| 6697 | This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as |
| 6698 | the list of arguments for `encode-time'. |
| 6699 | |
| 6700 | ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory |
| 6701 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to |
| 6702 | /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for |
| 6703 | site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs |
| 6704 | version. |
| 6705 | |
| 6706 | It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs |
| 6707 | version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating |
| 6708 | for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that |
| 6709 | has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself |
| 6710 | and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the |
| 6711 | problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. |
| 6712 | |
| 6713 | ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or |
| 6714 | .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating |
| 6715 | systems with limited file name syntax. |
| 6716 | |
| 6717 | Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function |
| 6718 | convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form |
| 6719 | for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file |
| 6720 | completions.el: |
| 6721 | |
| 6722 | (defvar save-completions-file-name |
| 6723 | (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") |
| 6724 | "*The filename to save completions to.") |
| 6725 | |
| 6726 | This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that |
| 6727 | depends on the operating system, because the definition of |
| 6728 | convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On |
| 6729 | Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On |
| 6730 | MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. |
| 6731 | |
| 6732 | ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument |
| 6733 | rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the |
| 6734 | minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) |
| 6735 | |
| 6736 | ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process |
| 6737 | marker from its buffer position. |
| 6738 | |
| 6739 | ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether |
| 6740 | Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. |
| 6741 | The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. |
| 6742 | |
| 6743 | ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors |
| 6744 | that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error |
| 6745 | condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any |
| 6746 | of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions |
| 6747 | matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, |
| 6748 | regardless of the value of debug-on-error. |
| 6749 | |
| 6750 | This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting |
| 6751 | errors that happen often during editing. |
| 6752 | |
| 6753 | ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum |
| 6754 | into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case |
| 6755 | puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. |
| 6756 | |
| 6757 | ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window |
| 6758 | now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. |
| 6759 | |
| 6760 | ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying |
| 6761 | a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer |
| 6762 | name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames |
| 6763 | to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., |
| 6764 | and not get-buffer-window. |
| 6765 | |
| 6766 | ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, |
| 6767 | calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer |
| 6768 | being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. |
| 6769 | |
| 6770 | If you use this feature, you should set the variable |
| 6771 | buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a |
| 6772 | property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a |
| 6773 | non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions |
| 6774 | are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil |
| 6775 | property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called |
| 6776 | over and over for the same text. |
| 6777 | |
| 6778 | ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el |
| 6779 | |
| 6780 | *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written |
| 6781 | in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: |
| 6782 | |
| 6783 | ;; @(#) HEADER: text |
| 6784 | ;; $HEADER: text $ |
| 6785 | |
| 6786 | in addition to the normal |
| 6787 | |
| 6788 | ;; HEADER: text |
| 6789 | |
| 6790 | *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify |
| 6791 | checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and |
| 6792 | lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. |
| 6793 | \f |
| 6794 | * For older news, see the file ONEWS. |
| 6795 | |
| 6796 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 6797 | Copyright information: |
| 6798 | |
| 6799 | Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 6800 | |
| 6801 | Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies |
| 6802 | of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the |
| 6803 | copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, |
| 6804 | thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. |
| 6805 | |
| 6806 | Permission is granted to distribute modified versions |
| 6807 | of this document, or of portions of it, |
| 6808 | under the above conditions, provided also that they |
| 6809 | carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. |
| 6810 | \f |
| 6811 | Local variables: |
| 6812 | mode: outline |
| 6813 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" |
| 6814 | end: |